JP2018029977A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enhance an amusement of games in a game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine is provided with: display means capable of displaying a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of identification information in respective plurality of columns based on an establishment of a start condition; and presentation control means. The presentation control means can perform a stop control for causing prescribed identification information being variably displayed to be in a stopped state. Before performing a temporary stop control for causing a temporary stop state different from the stopped state, the presentation control means changes identification information, which is displayed in a same column as the prescribed identification information being variably displayed and which is displayed in front of or behind the prescribed identification information in the variable display direction, to become a state more difficult to be visually recognized than the prescribed identification information.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 63

Description

The present invention comprises a display means capable of displaying a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of identification information based on establishment of a start condition, and an effect control means capable of executing an effect related to the variable display game. Related to the machine.

In a conventional gaming machine, a special game state in which a game is executed based on a winning of a start winning opening arranged in a gaming area, and a game value is given to a player when the result of the game becomes a specific result mode It is common for this to occur.

As such gaming machines, gaming machines that can execute various effects by using a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are provided (see, for example, Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2).

JP 2013-183871 A JP 2001-149576 A

However, in the above gaming machine, the variable display game is executed in a state where the hold display, the effect image, etc. overlap the identification information on the display screen, so that the effect display by the hold display, the effect image, etc. is conspicuous. It was difficult to attract the attention of the players, and there was room to improve the fun of the game.

  Then, an object of this invention is to improve the interest of a game.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, based on the establishment of the start condition, display means capable of displaying a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a plurality of columns, and effects related to the variable display game are executed. In the gaming machine provided with possible production control means, the production control means is capable of executing stop control that causes the predetermined identification information in the variable display to be in the stop state, and makes the temporary stop state different from the stop state. Before executing the temporary stop control, the identification information that is displayed in the same row as the predetermined identification information in the variable display and displayed before or after the variable display direction with respect to the predetermined identification information is obtained from the predetermined identification information. Is also changed so as to be in a state that is difficult to visually recognize.

According to one embodiment of the present invention described above, in the gaming machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the presentation control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure pending | holding information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit determination process. It is a figure which shows the jackpot probability according to a setting. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure change process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a usual game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a usual figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during normal map display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows single-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure 1 hold information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure 2 hold information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch symbol type command processing. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol type command process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation type command process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit system command process. It is a figure explaining the example of a setting of a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation aspect). It is a figure explaining the other example of a change pattern (variation mode). It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing when a prelude effect is performed. It is a figure which shows an example (1st half) of the operation | movement of a movable accessory in a warning effect, and the display of a display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example (2nd half) of the operation | movement of a movable accessory in a warning effect, and the display of a display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the other example of a display of the display apparatus in a warning effect. It is a figure which shows the other example of operation | movement of the movable accessory in sign production. It is a figure explaining the prelude production | presentation performed with a pseudo | simulation continuous variation aspect (what is called a pseudo continuation production). It is a figure which shows a mode that a character image acts on specific pending | holding display. It is a figure which shows an example of an action | operation availability lottery table and a change pending | holding change effect lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd type precursor effect (modified example of a precursor effect). It is a figure which shows the other example of the 2nd type precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the lottery table of holding | maintenance change frequency lottery, character lottery, and action frequency lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of a pending | holding change effect. It is a figure which shows the other example of a pending | holding change effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of holding change production. It is a figure explaining the situation where prefetch production is canceled when there is an abnormality in the number-of-holds command at the time of the occurrence of the hold. It is a figure explaining the situation where a pre-reading effect is not stopped when there is an abnormality in the number-of-holds command at the time of the occurrence of the hold. It is a figure explaining other situations where pre-reading production is canceled when there is an abnormality in the number-of-holds command when a hold occurs. It is a figure explaining the situation where prefetch production is stopped when there is an abnormality in the number-of-holds command at the time of a hold shift. It is a figure explaining the situation where prefetch production is not stopped when there is an abnormality in the number-of-holds command at the time of a hold shift. In 2nd Embodiment, it is a timing chart which shows the change of the display mode by the time progress of a hold display, and a decoration special symbol and a decoration reduction symbol. In 2nd Embodiment, it is the screen transition figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series, and is an example of the screen transition of the whole game when the number of pending | holdings has not reached the upper limit in the normal gaming state. In 2nd Embodiment, it is the screen transition figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series, and is an example of the screen transition of the whole game when the number of pending | holdings has reached the upper limit in the normal gaming state. In 2nd Embodiment, it is the screen transition figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series, and is an example of the screen transition of the whole game when a reach state generate | occur | produces in a normal game state. In 2nd Embodiment, it is the screen transition figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series, and is an example of the screen transition of the whole game when a pseudo | simulation continuous production | generation produces | generates. In 2nd Embodiment, it is the screen transition figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series, and is another example of the screen transition of the whole game when a pseudo | simulation continuous production | generation produces | generates. In 2nd Embodiment, it is the screen transition figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series, and is another 2nd example of the screen transition of the whole game when a pseudo | simulation continuous production | generation produces | generates. In 2nd Embodiment, it is the screen transition figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series, and is an example of the screen transition of the whole game when an effect display generate | occur | produces. In the modification of 2nd Embodiment, it is the screen transition figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus when a decoration 1st symbol is displayed by multiple lines in time series. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the single shot type command processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the stoppage production | presentation setting process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining the change of the display mode by the passage of time when it becomes a big hit in the display screen of the display device of a 3rd embodiment. In 3rd Embodiment, it is the screen transition figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus at the time of big hit in the time series. It is a timing chart explaining the change of the display mode by progress of time when it becomes a big hit in the display screen of the display of the modification of a 3rd embodiment. In the modification of 3rd Embodiment, it is the screen transition figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in which a fanfare background and a "hit" character are displayed with a different display mode according to the kind of jackpot in time series. It is a block diagram showing the production | presentation control apparatus of 4th Embodiment, the board | substrate etc. which are connected to this. In 4th Embodiment, it is a block diagram which shows the connection form of the several voltage generation circuit in the voltage generation part which comprises an effect control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the modification of the connection form of the several voltage generation circuit in the voltage generation part which comprises an effect control apparatus. It is a block diagram showing the connection form of the voltage generation circuit which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and its peripheral element. It is an internal block diagram of the voltage generation circuit which concerns on 4th Embodiment. 75 is a time chart at the time of power-on and power-off of output voltages of the core voltage generation circuit, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit, and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit according to the connection form of FIG. 76 is a time chart at the time of power-on and power-off of output voltages of the core voltage generation circuit, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit, and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit according to the connection form of FIG. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure showing the external appearance of an effect control apparatus and an LVDS board | substrate.

DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to directions viewed from the player who is playing the game.

[First Embodiment]
[Overall view of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be freely opened and closed through a hinge. The open / close frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area in which a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 is visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like disposed on the back side of the game board 30. Can do.

Various frame constituent members are disposed on the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

On the upper center and left side of the glass frame 15, a decoration device 1 capable of producing a light emission according to the gaming state
8a and 18b are provided. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emission effect according to the gaming state. The illumination members disposed inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are respectively disposed in the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15. Apart from these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19 b is disposed in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects toward the front (player side) is disposed. Protrusion production unit 1
3 is an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress of the game. Protrusion production unit 13
The illumination member disposed in the interior also forms part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launcher (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that receives an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that receives an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. .

The production operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated in the production button 25,
It is provided in the upper center of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in a special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or to execute a notice effect in advance for notifying the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. It should be noted that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when the variable display game is simply used, in this specification, the special figure variable display game is indicated.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only while the variable display game is being executed, but also when the player operates the effect operation device during non-execution.

Note that the gaming state when the variable display game is executed includes a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. In addition, the special game state means, for example, a state where the occurrence probability of a special result (for example, big hit) is high (probability change state, probability change state), big hit state (
Special gaming state).

Here, the probability variation state (specific game state) is one that continues until the next big hit (loop type), one that continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number-of-times type, ST), and There are things that continue until a predetermined probability falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

In addition, whether or not to generate a probable change state is not determined by the big hit symbol random number, it is possible to always generate a probable change state when a big hit occurs, or provide a winning device equipped with a specific area, etc. The probability variation state may be generated when a game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device that is operated when a player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27 and a return button 28.
And a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when borrowing a game ball, and the return button 28 is used when discharging a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which a balance such as a prepaid card is displayed.

The decoration device 22 houses an illumination member such as an LED and performs a light emission effect or the like according to the gaming state, and is provided at the front portion of the upper plate unit. The illumination member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launcher (not shown) and a game ball can be stored below the glass frame 15 including the above-described upper plate unit and the like, and below the front frame 12. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is disposed at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The firing speed of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is set so as to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. In other words, the ball launcher is a force (speed) for launching a game ball into the game area.
The firing force can be changed in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game ball can be fired in various launch modes with different firing forces. The firing mode includes left-handed (normal hit) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right-handed in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is disposed below the upper plate unit at a predetermined interval with respect to the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 includes a ball punching hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball punching hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation portion 23b to open the ball hole 23a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball hole 23a.

[Game board]
Next, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 is a flat game board body 3 serving as a mounting base for various members.
0a is provided. The game board main body 30a is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and the game board main body 30a
A game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front side. The gaming machine 10
A game ball is fired from a ball launcher into a game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

At the approximate center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window portion serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached. An effect display device (variable display device) that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner (variable display) behind the window portion formed in the center case 40.
A display device 41 is arranged. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. Note that the display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or a CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and identification information (special symbols) and characters that produce a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, an image based on the progress of the game (a jackpot display, a fanfare display, an ending display, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

In addition, a game ball flowing down the game area 32 is placed in the center case 40 in the center case 40.
There are provided an inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the inside of the game, and a stage portion 40b on which the game ball that has passed through the warp passage 40e can roll. The stage portion 40b of the center case 40 includes a start winning port unit 1 including a first starting winning port 36 and a third starting winning port 42.
Since it is arranged above 01, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 40b can easily win the first start winning opening 36 and the third starting winning opening 42.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The top effect unit 40c (may be a movable accessory) and the side effect unit 40d (may be a movable accessory) constitute a part of the panel decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the panel effect device 44 (see FIG. 4). doing.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol start gate (ordinary start gate) 34 is provided. A gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided inside the general diagram start gate 34. When the game ball that has been driven into the game area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, the usual figure variation display game is executed.

A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of a game ball to the general winning opening 35 is a winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning opening 35.
) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3).

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning port unit 101 is provided. Below the start winning opening unit 101 is a first start winning opening 36 (first start winning area, start opening 1) that gives a start condition (starting condition) of the special figure 1 variable display game when a game ball wins.
) And a third start winning opening 42 (third start winning area, start opening 3) that gives a start condition (start condition) of the special figure 2 variable display game when the game ball wins.

The start winning port unit 101 receives a game ball entered from the common entrance 103 and receives a winning switching mechanism 105.
And the first start winning opening 36 and the third starting winning opening 42 can be alternately awarded. As the winning change mechanism 105, a known mechanism (for example, JP-A-201 201
5-36026 gazette and JP-A-2015-77230 gazette) can be used. The winning switching mechanism 105 constitutes an area changing means for changing the winning area.

The winning switching mechanism 105 distributes the game balls that have entered from the common entrance 103 of the start winning opening unit 101 to the left side (first starting winning opening 36 side) and the right side (third starting winning opening 42 side), and the start winning opening unit. 101 is caused to flow down. The game ball is more likely to flow into the common entrance 103 of the start winning opening unit 101 when left-handed when the game ball is made to flow down on the left side of the game area 32 than when it is right-handed.

The winning switch mechanism 105 includes a rotating member that rotates about the rotation axis with respect to the start winning port unit 101 main body, and a stopper member that stops the rotation of the rotating member. The rotating member has three extending portions extending in three directions from the rotating shaft. By three extending portions, there is an L-shaped storage portion that stores a game ball that flows down to the first start winning port 36, and an L-shaped storage portion that stores a game ball that flows down to the third start winning port 42. It is formed.

The winning switch mechanism 105 alternately rotates the rotating member on the left side and the right side, and alternately switches the starting winning port for winning the game ball to the first starting winning port 36 and the third starting winning port 42. As long as there is no error, the game balls that have entered the common entrance 103 of the start winning port unit 101 are alternately turned to the left side (first start winning port 36 side) and right side (third start winning port 42 side) by the winning switching mechanism 105. Thus, the first start winning opening 36 and the third starting winning opening 42 are alternately won (entered).

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, below the usual start gate 34,
A normal variation winning device 37 having a second starting winning opening (second starting winning area) for providing a start condition (starting condition) for the special figure 2 variable display game based on the winning of the game ball is provided. The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that is converted into a state in which a game ball easily flows by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts to the right side. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball is prevented from winning the normal variation winning device 37. The game ball is the first starting prize opening 3
6. When winning at the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) or the third starting winning opening 42, a special figure changing display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

The movable member 37b is a so-called electric Chu-type ordinary electric accessory, and is rotated via a general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal-variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. Then, the game ball is changed to an open state in which the game ball easily flows into the normal variation winning device 37 (a winning easy state advantageous to the player).

The movable member 37b is controlled by a game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of an easy-to-win state by shortening the variation time of the normal variation display game or setting the probability of hitting the general variation display game to be higher than usual. By making the generation time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in the above, a short time state (general power support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific gaming state. Note that even in the probability change state (excluding the latent probability change state) as the specific game state, a short time state (the ordinary power support state) occurs.

In the game area 32 on the lower left side of the normal variable winning device 37, there is a large winning opening solenoid 39b (FIG. 3).
), A special variable winning device 39 having an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that opens the grand prize opening by being retracted from the front to the back is provided. The special variable winning device 39 converts the state where the special winning opening is closed (blocking state unfavorable for the player) from the closed state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure changing display game, A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player by facilitating the flow of the game ball into the mouth. Note that a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is provided in the special winning opening as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening.

The variable winning device unit 107 is provided with a general winning port 35 in the lower right game area 32 in addition to the large winning port of the special variable winning device 39.

General winning opening 35, first starting winning opening 36, third starting winning opening 42, ordinary variable winning apparatus 37,
When a game ball wins a big winning opening of the special variable winning device 39, the payout control device 200 (FIG. 3).
(See) discharges the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning prize opening from the payout device to the upper plate 21.
The game area 32 below the start winning port unit 101 is provided with an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

In addition, a special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game) and a common figure fluctuation display game are executed outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 (LED lamps) that display information such as the current gaming state.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (special figure 1 display) and a second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 for a variable display game configured by a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. (Special Figure 2 Display), Fluctuation Display Unit 53 for Normal Map Fluctuation Display Game (General Figure Display), and Memory Display Unit for Starting (Holding) Memory Number Notification of Each Fluctuation Display Game (Special Figure 1 Hold A display 54, a special figure 2 holding display 55, and a universal drawing holding display 56).

In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a first gaming state display unit 57 (first gaming state indicator) for notifying whether the player is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (when normally hit). The second gaming state display unit 58 (second gaming state indicator) that lights up when the time-short state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time-short state, the jackpot probability state being a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on 3rd game state display part 59 which displays (3rd game state indicator, high probability information LED, probability state display part)
A round display section 60 for displaying the number of rounds at the time of big hit (the number of times of opening / closing the special variable winning device 39) is provided.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by variable display in which identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (flashing). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit,
It may be composed of an assembly of multiple LEDs, and when performing variable display, all LEDs provided as indicators are all turned on and off (simultaneously blinking of all LEDs) or cyclically turned on (any 1 LED may be turned on and off in a predetermined order every predetermined time), or may be performed by turning on / off (flashing) or circulating lighting by a predetermined number of LEDs among a plurality of LEDs. Also on the normal display 53, the variation display game is executed by variation display (flashing) in which the LED lamp is repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the general-purpose display 53 can be appropriately configured in the same manner as the special-figure 1 display 51 and the special-figure 2 display 52.

The lamp display device 80 includes lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that perform variable display (flashing) that repeats turning on and off as symbols (fourth special symbol described later), and starting each special diagram variable display game. It has a lamp display section 3-6 (LED) for notifying the stored number (holding number). The lamp display device 80 is controlled by an effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle as a variable display. Collective display device 50
In the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the common figure display 53, the game control device 100 measures the variation time of the variation display, while the lamp display unit 1 of the lamp display device 80, 2
Is measured by the production control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (decoration special figure 1 hold LED1, decoration special figure 1 hold LED2) display the decoration special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) according to the light-off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (decoration special figure 2 hold LED1, decoration special figure 2 hold LED2) indicate the decoration special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) according to the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. indicate.

The blinking cycle of the lamp display units 1 and 2 (fourth special symbol described later) and the blinking cycle of the lamp display unit 3-6 (decoration special figure hold) are both the same 200 msec (100 msec on, 100 m).
(sec off) may be used, but the blinking period may be made different so as to easily distinguish the decorative special figure hold from the fourth special symbol. Further, the on / off (display / non-display) time of the lamp display unit 1-6 may be varied.

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the details of the general map variation display game and the special map variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from a ball launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, the first start Wins the winning port 36, the third start winning port 42, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39, or flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and is discharged from the gaming area 32 Is done. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the third starting winning opening 42, the normal variable winning apparatus 37, or the special variable winning apparatus 39, the number corresponding to the type of the winning opening that has been won Of the prize ball through the dispensing device 2
1 is discharged.

The normal start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed the normal start gate 34. When the game ball passes through the normal start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number value for hit determination extracted at this time.

A state in which the normal map variable display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map variable display game has already been executed and the normal map variable display game has not ended, or the result of the normal map variable display game is normal When the variable winning device 37 has been converted to the open state, when the game ball passes the normal start gate 34, if the normal start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the stored number is added (+1).

In the normal map start memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining the hit error of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored, and when this hit determination random number value coincides with the determination value, the normal map change display is performed. A specific result mode (specific result) is derived by winning the game.

The universal map display game is executed by a universal map display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The general-purpose indicator 53 is composed of LEDs indicating normal identification information (general-purpose) in the lit state and indicating a shift in the unlit state, and the normal identification information varies by blinking this LED. Display is performed, and after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the common figure random number value extracted when passing through the common figure start gate 34 is a winning value, the normal symbol displayed on the universal figure display unit 53 stops in a hit state and enters a hit state. At this time, when the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) is driven, the movable member 37b is converted to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 is converted. Winning is allowed.

The winning opening to the first starting winning opening 36, the winning to the normal variation winning winning device 37, and the winning to the third starting winning opening 42 are the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a.
(See FIG. 3) and the start port 3 switch 42a (see FIG. 3). The game ball won in the first start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball in the special figure 1 variable display game, and is stored with a predetermined upper limit number (4 in the present embodiment) as a limit, and an ordinary variable winning device 37 And the game ball won in the third start winning opening 42 is detected as a start winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 in this embodiment).

When detecting the start winning ball of the special figure variation display game, the big hit random number value, the big hit symbol random number value, each fluctuation pattern random number value and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure holding storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control apparatus 100 as a special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of eight times). The number stored in the special figure 1 start winning memory (the special figure 1 starting memory, the first start memory) is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50 and the display device 41. Also displayed on the display screen. Special figure 2 start winning memory (Special figure 2 start memory, second
The number of stored “start memory” is displayed on the special figure 2 holding display 55 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50 and also on the display screen of the display device 41.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning at the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. In addition, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game by the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning to the normal variation winning device 37 or the third start winning opening 42 or the second start memory.

The special figure 1 fluctuation display game (first special figure fluctuation display game) and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) are identified in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 (see FIG. This is performed by suspending and displaying a predetermined result form after variably displaying special symbols and special symbols). Also,
In the display device 41, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to each special figure fluctuation display game.

In the decoration special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decoration special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order, scrolling display is started, symbols changing after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special figure changing display game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 displays various effects such as the appearance of characters in order to improve interest. In addition, in the special display variation display game, as the special special symbol (identification information), the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) fluctuates due to repetition (flashing) of the lighting display and the extinction display. Indicates that the display game is being executed. The variation display of the fourth special symbol is stopped after a predetermined time from the start with “lights off” in the case of a loss and “lights up” in the case of a big hit. The variation display of the fourth special symbol is displayed by the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) of the lamp display device 80, but the other display devices 4
1. It may be displayed on the sub display device.

When a game ball is won at the first start winning opening 36, the third starting winning opening 42 or the normal variable winning apparatus 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number at the time of winning detection is a big hit value)
Includes a specific result mode (special result mode) depending on the display pattern as a result of the special map fluctuation display game.
Is derived, and a big hit state (special game state) is entered. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are arranged).

At this time, the special variable winning device 39 is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the large winning port solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). That is, the big prize opening provided in the special variable prize winning device 39 opens widely for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls wins, during which the player is given a privilege that he can acquire many game balls. The

At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short period of time by energizing the large winning solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3).

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display game is not executed simultaneously. Is set as follows.

As for the decorative special figure fluctuation display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game may be executed in different display devices or in different display areas, or the same display. You may make it perform in an apparatus or a display area. In this case, the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prevented from being executed simultaneously. It should be noted that the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are executed in the order in which the winnings (that is, start-up memory) are generated (in order of winning), and the special figure 1 variable display game and / or When the start-up memory of the special figure 2 variable display game is generated and the special figure variable display game can be executed, the variable display game based on the start memory generated the oldest is executed.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

Further, although not particularly limited, the start port 1 switch 36 a in the first start winning prize port 36, the start port 2 switch 37 a in the normal variation winning device 37, and the start port 3 in the third start winning prize port 42. The switch 42a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the count switch (39a) are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and a non-contact that detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. A type of magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used. Further, a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or a front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like (
A micro switch having a mechanical contact can be used as the main body frame open detection switch.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 is a gaming control device 10
The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for overall control of games, and has a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111.
A U unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, a CPU unit 110, a data bus 140 connecting the input unit 120 and the output unit 130, and the like.

The CPU unit 110 is a game microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111 and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that includes an oscillator such as a crystal resonator and generates a clock for a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 include DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates a DC32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from a DC32V voltage, and the like. , Gaming microcomputer 11
1 has a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the internal RAM at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a control signal such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be exchanged when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 43 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By providing 0, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power source is a game microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the gaming microcomputer 1
11 forcibly initializes the information stored in the RAM 111c in the RAM 11 and the RAM in the payout control apparatus 200. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a.
Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and read / write RA at any time
M (random access memory) 111c is provided.

The ROM 111b stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a work area for the CPU 111a and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as ROM 111b or RAM 11
As 1c, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

In addition, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the effects, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. The variation pattern (variation mode) may include a pattern that causes reach.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. A gaming state in which the gaming state is advantageous to the player when it becomes a special result mode (special gaming state)
In the gaming machine 10 that becomes, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed,
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display in all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same identification information It is also possible to set the reach state (except for the special result mode) to the reach state and display the remaining one variable display area in a variable manner from the reach state.

And, the reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of special result mode is different (expected value is different) as a system (reach type, type) of reach effects, normal reach (N reach), Special 0 Reach (SP0 Reach), Special 1 Reach (SP
1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach. The expected value (expectation, reliability) increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 0 reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach (full turn reach). .
In addition, the reach state is at least when a special result mode is derived in the special figure fluctuation display game (
In the case of a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is likely to be a big hit compared to the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the game machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the jackpot of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various patterns A random number generation circuit for generating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation display game in a variation display without reach or a variation display without reach, and an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 Based on a predetermined period for the CPU 111a (for example, 4
A clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interruption signal of msec (milliseconds) and an update timing of the random number generation circuit is provided.

In addition, the CPU 111a performs the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure variation display game.
One of the variation pattern tables is acquired from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state, and the starting memory number. Based on the above, one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. Here, the CPU 11
When executing a special figure fluctuation display game, 1a serves as fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to thereby win a prize ball. Control to pay out.
Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout unit 91 to drive the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the loan request signal from the card unit 600 to pay out the loaned money.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the general start gate 34, and a start port 1 in the first start winning port 36. Switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a in the second start winning prize port 37
Are connected to the start opening 3 switch 42a in the third start winning opening 42, the winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning apparatus 39, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which receives a negative logic signal such as the above and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F1
21, detection signals from the gate switch 34 a, start port 1 switch 36 a, start port 2 switch 37 a, start port 3 switch 42 a, winning port switch 35 a, and big winning port switch 39 a are input to the third input port 124. The

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a setting change device 43 (setting change means) that can change settings related to the game conditions, and the second input port 123 is connected to the setting change device 43 and is connected to the setting change device 43. A signal is input. For example, the setting change device 43 may be a setting change device normally provided in a slot machine, and may be configured by a key switch, a button switch, a 7 segment type display (LED lamp), and the like. The setting change device 43 is provided inside the gaming machine 10 and is provided, for example, at a position that cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened (a position that cannot be accessed). That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting change device 43. Note that the setting change device 43 may be provided on the game control device 100 (on the main board).

The setting change device 43 can change settings relating to game conditions such as the probability of jackpot and the probability variation rate. In the present embodiment, the settings relating to the game conditions are settings 1 and 2
, Setting 3, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player (low setting), setting 2 is an intermediate setting (intermediate setting), and setting 3 is the most advantageous setting for the player (high setting). It is.

Further, the second input port 123 has a detection signal from a fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10, a frame radio wave fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, and a payout busy signal. Is entered. Note that a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the second input port 123. The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame). Is the payout busy signal in a state in which the payout control device 200 can accept a command? It is a signal indicating whether or not.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 42a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124. It is configured.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

The data held in the third input port 124 is stored in the enable signal CE by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read out by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

In addition, the input unit 120 includes a signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame 12, and a status indicating a payout abnormality. A signal, a shot ball break switch signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout,
There is provided a first input port 122 that takes in an overflow switch signal indicating overflow and a touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 and supplies the touch switch signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full).

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and are then connected to the gaming microcomputer 1 via the data bus 140.
11 is taken in. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the output unit 13.
0 is supplied to each port. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows.

Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is sent from the ports 122 and 123 of the input unit 120.
, 124 are not supplied. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced / sold product) installed in the game store. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies the signal to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. Yes. The port on the relay board 70 is connected to the gaming microcomputer 11.
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the trial test apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 receives opening / closing data of a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c that is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the normal variation winning device 37 and a solenoid (large winning port solenoid) 39b that opens the special variation winning device 39. A second output port 134 for output is provided.

In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. ON / OFF of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected
A fourth output port 136 for outputting off-data is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 receives information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information from the external information terminal 71.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for output to. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 includes a general-purpose solenoid 37 output from the second output port 134.
c, a first driver (driving circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal in response to an opening / closing data signal of the special prize opening solenoid 39b, and a segment on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135 Second driver 1 that outputs a line on / off drive signal
38b, a third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the fourth output port 136, and is supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137. A fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. In addition, the collective display device 50
DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b for driving the segment line. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so as to be lit. 4th which outputs an external information signal to the external information terminal 71
The driver 138d is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 250. Photocoupler 13
9 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 250 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG.
These are block diagrams of the production control system of the gaming machine 10.

The production control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
And a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing for video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A sound source LSI 314 is provided for controlling the output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program executed by the CPU and various data stored therein.
Program ROM 321 composed of ROM (programmable read only memory), RAM 322 providing work area, Fe capable of retaining stored contents even if power is not supplied at the time of power failure
The RAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 serving as a time measuring means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the presentation, instructs the VDP 312 about the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, turns on the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 also has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30.
C, a synchronization signal STS for giving data transmission timing is input. VDP 312
To the main control microcomputer 311, a wait time for notifying the status of waiting for the reception of commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the interrupt signals INT0 to n in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Command I / F3
31. The special figure holding number command, the decorative special figure command, the change command, the stop information command, and the like transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are received as production control command signals (production commands). . The gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 is DC5
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40) a board effect device 44 (for example, a display device 41)
A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25 b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function for detecting the on / off state of the production effect switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like, and a detection signal input to the main control microcomputer 311, or a volume adjustment switch provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of 335 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 includes the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration.
In order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled thereby, DC 32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, DC 12V for driving a motor or LED, DC5 that is the power supply voltage of the command I / F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15 V voltage for driving a motor, LED, and speaker.

Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. DC-
The DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. The VDP 312 (VDRESET signal) and the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
Are supplied to an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the production control device 300 includes a cooling FA for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state where N45 is connected and the effect control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. Game control device 1
In the CPU 111a of the 00 gaming microcomputer 111, a random number value for determining the normal hit is extracted and stored in the ROM 111b based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal start gate 34. It is compared with the determined determination value, and it is determined whether or not the normal variation display game is missed.

Then, the universal symbol display game is displayed on the universal symbol display device, after the identification symbol is varied and displayed for a predetermined time, and then stopped. When the result of the general-purpose variable display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the general-purpose display, and the general-purpose solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display.

In addition, the start winning (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start opening 1 switch 36a provided in the first starting winning opening 36, and based on the start memory, the special figure 1 variable display game is stored. A random number for jackpot determination is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b.
Special figure 1 It is determined whether or not the fluctuation display game is missed.

Further, the start opening 2 switch 37a and the third start winning opening 4 provided in the normal variation winning apparatus 37 are provided.
2 stores the start memory based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 3 switch 42a provided in 2 and extracts the random number for determining the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game based on the start memory.
Compared with the determination value stored in the OM 111b, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is hit.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including a determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, a special figure variation display game for stopping and displaying is displayed. In other words, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the variable display game is based on winning in the starting winning area (the first starting winning port 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the third starting winning port 42) of the game balls flowing down the game area 32. It constitutes a game control means for controlling the progress.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays a decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed.
That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays a special result state on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates a special gaming state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a win. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a
For example, the opening / closing door 39c of the special variable prize winning device 39 is opened by the big prize opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed to allow the inflow of game balls into the big prize opening.

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big prize opening. One round (R) is to open the grand prize opening until such a condition is achieved, and control (cycle game) is continued (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 times, 6 times, etc.). . That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability variation state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of either the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short-time state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the short-time state, the normal fluctuation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the short-time operation state, and the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is compared to the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. In order to control so that the opening time of
Electric support state). Even in a high probability state (normal probability variation state) excluding the latent probability variation state, the ordinary power support (electric support) is executed in a time-short state overlappingly.

For example, in the short-time state, the execution time of the above-mentioned normal map change display game (normal map change time)
Can be shortened to a second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the short time state, the execution time of the special figure change display game (special figure change time) is also shortened from the normal time, and the time reduction fluctuation of the special figure change display game is executed.

In the short-time state, the first stoppage time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game is set to the first time.
Second stop time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the stop time (for example, 1604 msec)
It is possible to control so that

Also, in the short time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal variation display game being won, the first release time (for example, 100 msec) in which the release time (normal power release time) is the normal state. It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer (for example, 1352 msec).

Further, in the short-time state, the number of times of opening the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is greater than the number of times of opening the first time (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal-variation display game. It is possible to set the number of second releases (for example, 4 times). In the short time state, it is possible to set the probability of being a hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal probability) to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Thereby, in the short time state, winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased as compared with the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. In the normal operation state, the movable member 3
7b may be set so as not to be opened (the probability of normal transmission is 0). Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 7 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing a procedure of main processing by the game control apparatus 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control apparatus 100, the step code (number) is represented as “A ***”.

As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control apparatus 100 first executes a process for prohibiting interruption (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is executed for setting a stack pointer that is the start address of an area in which the value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (A1006).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). A game control device 1 which constitutes a main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in the power delay timer
A standby time (for example, 3) for waiting until the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from 00 normally starts.
Second) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and the sub control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 3).
(E.g., 00), a standby unit for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation.

The power supply delay timer is measured using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not a target for RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thus, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, a part of R
Since it is not necessary to calculate by excluding the AM area, it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122,
By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the waiting time, the initialization switch 11
2 operations can be detected reliably. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the time measurement of the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (from A1008 to A
1012).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads and checks the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus (
(For example, twice) is set (A1008), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1).
009).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is “Y
]), It is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008 (A1010). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “N”), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the power failure monitoring signal in step A1009 is on.

In addition, when the game control device 100 determines that the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the gaming machine Wait until the power is turned off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not ON (the result of A1009 is “
N "), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1011), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1012 is “N”), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

Further, the game control device 100 determines that the timer value is 0 (the result of A1012 is “Y”).
) In other words, when the standby time is completed, access to a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (A1013), and off data is output to all output ports (no output) (A1014).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015). ).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the setting change device 43 is on, that is, whether or not the setting change device 43 is in a state in which the setting can be changed (A1016). For example, when the key switch of the setting change device 43 is on due to a key being inserted or the like, it can be determined that the setting change device 43 is on.

When the setting change device 43 is on (the result of A1016 is “
Y "), a setting change process for changing the setting is executed (A1017). In the setting change process, every time the button switch of the setting change device 43 is pressed by the operator, the setting of the gaming machine 10 is changed and selected as setting 1 → setting 2 → setting 3 → setting 1. Instead of operating the button switch, the setting may be changed by rotating the key to a predetermined position. Then, the selected setting values 1 to 3 are displayed on the 7-segment display of the setting change device 43. When the key switch of the setting change device 43 is turned off because the key is removed, etc.
The setting (that is, the setting value) is confirmed and stored in the setting information storage area in the RWM (storage means), and the setting change process ends. The seven-segment display of the setting change device 43 may be changed in direct association with the operation of the button switch via an electric circuit, or may be changed via the game microcomputer 111.

The game control device 100 determines that the setting change device 43 is not on (the result of A1016 is “
N "), it is determined whether or not the initialization switch 112 has been turned on from the state of the first input port 122 read in advance (A1018). Here, it is determined whether or not to execute initialization for clearing the RAM area.

When the initialization switch 112 is OFF (the result of A1018 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the value of the power outage inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data. Determine (A1019). If the result is normal (the result of A1019 is “Y”)
), It is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1020).

Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1020 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 calculates a checksum for a predetermined area in the RWM (a legitimacy determination unit). Is executed (A1021), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum at the time of power-off (A1022). If the checksums match (A
If the result of 1022 is “Y”), the process proceeds to the process of Step A1023 in FIG.

If the processing in steps A1021 and A1022 is performed separately in the setting information storage area and the game information storage area in the RWM, only the area where the mismatch is detected in the subsequent steps A1028-A1032. May be initialized (for the game information storage area) or set to the default setting (for the setting information storage area), even if a mismatch is detected in one area, Initialize area (for game information storage area)
The default setting (for the setting information storage area) may be used. For example, when an abnormality (a checksum mismatch) in the setting information storage area is detected, a later step A103
1, assuming that erroneous setting information is saved in the setting information storage area, predetermined setting information (for example, setting 1) can be saved as an initial value in the setting information storage area as a default setting. The game information storage area is an area for storing game information (for example, random number, customer waiting demonstration information, production mode setting, etc.) related to the game (variable display game).

In addition, the game control device 100 determines that the setting change process is performed (the result of A1016 is “Y
”), When the initialization switch 112 is ON (result of A1018 is“ Y ”), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (result of A1019 is“ N ”)
Or the result of A1020 is “N”), if the checksum is not normal (A102
2 is “N”), the process proceeds to the process of step A1028 in FIG. 5B to execute the initialization process. That is, the setting change device 43 and the initialization switch 112 constitute an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 operates on the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit.
Initializing means for initializing the data stored in. In the case of changing the setting, since the initialization after the setting change process is performed before determining whether the initialization switch 112 is turned on, the initialization by the setting change and the switch 112 are turned on. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which initialization is not performed repeatedly.

The game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (A10).
23). The areas to be initialized are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The setting information storage area is excluded from the area to be initialized. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game state is a high probability state by examining an area for storing the game state in the RWM (A1024).
.

Here, when the gaming state is not the high probability state (the result of A1024 is “N”), the game control device 100 skips the processing of step A1025 and step A1026 and proceeds to the processing of step A1027. When the gaming state is a high probability state (A1
The result of 024 is “Y”), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A1025),
For example, the high-probability notification LED (error indicator) provided in the collective display device 50 is turned on (lighted).
Data is saved in the segment area (A1026). And the command at the time of a power failure restoration corresponding to the process number prepared in order to rationally execute the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1027), and step A1033 Execute the process.

On the other hand, when the processing of step A1028 is executed after execution of steps A1018, A1019, A1020, and A1022, the game control device 100 sets the RAM access prohibited area to access permission (A1028). Furthermore, all R except for the setting information storage area
The AM area (including the busy signal status area) is cleared to 0 (A1029), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (A1030). The process of step A1029 is as follows:
An initialization unit is configured to initialize (clear) an area other than the setting information storage area in the storage unit (RAM).

And the game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area | region which should be initialized (A1031). The area to be initialized here is, for example, a partial area of the game information storage area (an area related to customer waiting demo information, an area related to setting of the effect mode, etc.). Basically, the setting information storage area is not an area to be initialized, but if the checksum is not normal (result of A1022 is “N”), incorrect setting information is saved in the setting information storage area. Therefore, prescribed setting information (for example, setting 1 which is a default setting) may be saved in the setting information storage area as an initial value. As mentioned above, RW
The checksum may be calculated separately for the setting information storage area and the game information storage area in M,
If any checksum of the setting information storage area and the game information storage area is not normal,
Values and information may be saved only in the non-normal area, or values and information may be saved in both areas. Furthermore, the game control device 100 transmits a command at the time of RAM initialization to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1032), and executes the process of step A1033.

In addition, the command at the time of power failure recovery transmitted by the process of step A1027 and step A1
The RAM initialization command transmitted in the process 032 includes a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, a decoration special figure 1 holding number command indicating the number of holdings of special figures 1 and 2, and a decoration special figure 2 holding number. A command and a probability information command indicating a probability state are included. Furthermore, the command at the time of power failure restoration and the command at the time of RAM initialization include a setting information command indicating setting information (setting value and setting information) of the gaming machine 10 and a power supply restoration (turn-on). The recovery screen command shown is included. In addition, depending on the state when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, if the customer is waiting when the power is turned off, a customer waiting demo command is included. Furthermore, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, and a time-saving count information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time-saving state are included. Since the initialization of the RAM is performed when the power is restored (turned on), the RAM initialization command includes a RAM indicating that the RAM has been initialized (cleared) in addition to the command at the time of power failure restoration. An initialization command is also included. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the setting information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and the effect control device 300 subsequently performs effect control with reference to the setting information stored by itself. Do.

The gaming control device 100 is a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
) The circuit is activated (A1033). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and the CPU 11 based on the divided signal.
A timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to 1a and a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a random number update trigger to be supplied to the random number generation circuit are provided.

After executing the CTC activation process of step A1033, the game control apparatus 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1034). Specifically, a predetermined register (CTC) in the random number generation circuit.
The setting of the code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in the update permission register) is C
Performed by PU 111a. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines

In the present embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random numbers according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random numbers can be broken and the confidentiality of the random numbers can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (random numbers that determine the big hit symbol (big hit symbol) Random number 1, jackpot symbol random number 2), random number to determine the hit of ordinary figure (per random number)
R as the initial value (start value) of a random number (per symbol random number, etc.) that determines the normal symbol
The data is saved in a predetermined area of the WM (A1035), and an interrupt is permitted (A1036). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on.
(Start value), you can break the regularity of random numbers generated by software,
It is possible to make it difficult for a player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1037). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is C
This is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the PU. CTC (C different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing
It is a “low speed counter” that is updated based on TC2)).

In the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” is adopted in which each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value every time the random number goes around. Each random number may be updated by a counter by +1 or 1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within a range appear without overlapping until one round is completed.
That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number is a random number that is updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step A1037, the game control device 100 executes the power supply device 40.
A power failure monitoring signal input from 0 is read via the port and data bus and the number of times to check is set (A1038), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (A10).
39). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1039 is “N”), step A
The process returns to the initial value random number update process of 1037. That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (A1037) (A1036), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to prevent the interruption process from being pressed by waiting in the value random number update process.

Note that the initial value random number update process of step A1037 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. When such a method is adopted, both of the initial value random number update processes are performed. In order to avoid the execution of the update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is ON (the result of A1039 is “Y”), the game control device 10
0 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in the processing of step A1038 (A1040). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (the result of A1040 is “N”), the process returns to step A1039 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100 once interrupts when the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks (the result of A1040 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. Is prohibited (A1041), and off data is output to all output ports (A104).
2).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection region check data 1 in the power failure inspection region 1 (A1043) and saves the power failure inspection region check data 2 in the power failure inspection region 2 (
A1044). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off is executed (A1045), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1046).
). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1047), and the system waits until the gaming machine is powered off.

In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

The main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111c capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, initialization means (game control device 100) that initializes data stored in the RAM 111c based on the operation of the initialization operation unit, The operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

In addition, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111c after the standby time has elapsed.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing a procedure of initial value random number update processing. The initial value random number update process is executed in step A1035 of the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B.

The game control device 100 first updates (by 1) the jackpot symbol initial value random number (+1) (
A1201). Subsequently, the winning initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1202), the winning symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1203), and the initial value random number updating process is terminated.

Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that becomes an initial value of a random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure. Also, the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the usual figure variation game, and the “hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that determines the hit stop symbol of the normal figure. It is a random number that is the initial value.

As described above, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as a register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM head address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the register used in the main process. When timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 receives inputs from various sensors and switches, captures signals,
That is, an input process for reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). further,
Based on the output data set in various processes, solenoid (big prize opening solenoid 39b)
An output process for performing drive control of the actuator is executed (A1304). If a signal prohibiting firing is output in step A1005 in the main process,
By performing this output process, a signal for permitting firing is output, and the launch permitting signal can be set to a permitted state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes payout command transmission processing for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processing to the payout control device 200 (A1305), and further, random number update processing 1 (A1306), random number update Process 2 (A1307) is executed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 42a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 39a, and an error. A winning prize switch / state monitoring process is executed (A1308) for monitoring (such as whether the front frame or the glass frame is open).

Further, a special figure game process for performing a process related to the special figure fluctuation display game is executed (A1309).
Next, a general game process for performing a process related to the normal map display game is executed (A131).
0).

Next, the game control device 100 is provided in the gaming machine 10 and executes a segment LED editing process for driving a segment LED that displays special information variation game and various information related to the game to display desired contents. (A1311).

Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1312). Furthermore, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (panel radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking whether there is any abnormality by checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board is executed (A1313).

After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1314). Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that, when the timer interrupt process returns, the interrupt disabled state and the register bank specification are automatically restored, but depending on the CPU used, the interrupt is permitted after the external information editing process. Or a process of returning the register bank designation to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (A1305) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a procedure of payout command transmission processing.

The game control device 100 first checks whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (A1701). The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111c of the game control apparatus 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By comparing these two signals,
It is possible to monitor unauthorized payments.

Each of these winning number counter areas is provided with a winning number counter area for each of the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls). Accordingly, 1 is added to the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area based on the winning at the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. Note that a larger area than the winning number counter area 2 is assigned to the winning number counter area 1 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination, and more unsent This is because data may be accumulated.

In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 in step A1701, the game control apparatus 100 receives a winning that is a check target among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls. It is determined whether there is a count number other than “0” in the number counter area.

When there is no count number in the winning number counter area 2 (A170)
The result of 1 is “N”), and the address of the winning counter area 2 to be checked is updated (
A1702). Further, it is determined whether or not the check of the count numbers in all the winning number counter areas has been completed (A1703).

When all the checks are completed (the result of A1703 is “
Y "), the process proceeds to step A1712. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (the result of A1703 is “N”), the process returns to step A1701, and the processes from step A1701 to step A1703 are repeated.

In addition, the game control device 100 determines that there is a count number (the result of A1701 is “Y”).
), The count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (A1704), and the payout number corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 2 is acquired (A1705). Then, the value in the prize ball remaining area and the number of payouts are added (A1706), and the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining area as a new prize ball remaining number (A1707). Note that as the value of the remaining prize ball area before the processing of step A1707, a fraction that has not reached a predetermined number as a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 subtracts 10 from the addition result (A1708), and determines whether or not the subtraction result is 0 or more (A1709). If it is not greater than 0 (A1709)
Is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1712. On the other hand, if it is 0 or more (the result of A1709 is “Y”), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (A17).
10) The subtraction result is saved in the remaining number of winning balls area (A1711), and further, in step A170
Return to the process of 8.

Through the above processing, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . In addition, by outputting the main prize ball signal, when game balls are paid out during a big hit, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.

If the payout command transmission timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates −1 (A171).
2) It is determined whether or not the payout command transmission timer has reached 0 (A1713). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (the result of A1713 is “N”), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (the result of A1713 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal status (flag) is busy (busy state flag) (A1714).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can start the payout control immediately. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is in the on state (
Busy state). That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal status (flag) is determined based on the state of the payout busy signal.
Is information that sets whether or not payout control can be started immediately, idle state in which payout control can be started immediately, busy state in which payout control cannot be started immediately, and indefinite state in which the state is indefinite Is set.

When the payout busy signal status is busy, the game control apparatus 100 (A1
If the result of 714 is “Y”), the payout command transmission process is terminated. When not busy, the idle state and the undefined state are included. Thus, the dispensing control device 2
If 00 cannot immediately start payout control and does not send a payout command, it prevents unnecessary processing from being performed by avoiding subsequent processing related to sending out the payout command, thereby reducing the control burden. I try to reduce it.

The indefinite state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal status area in the process at power-on. This indeterminate state means that an idle state or a busy state is set based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time indicating that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be executed. To eliminate. That is, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, a prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the fact that a state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

When the payout busy signal status is not busy, the game control apparatus 100 (A1
If the result of 714 is “N”), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (A1715). In the process of checking whether the winning number counter area 1 has a count, among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, a count number other than “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. It is determined whether or not there is.

And the game control apparatus 100 (when the result of A1715 is "N" when there is no count number.
”), The address of the winning counter area 1 to be checked is updated (A1716), and it is determined whether or not the checking of the counting numbers of all winning counter areas has been completed (A17).
17). If all checks are completed (the result of A1717 is “Y”), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if all checks have not been completed (A171
7 is “N”), the process returns to step A1715, and steps A1715 to A17 are performed.
Repeat the process up to 17.

In addition, the game control device 100 determines that there is a count number (the result of A1715 is “Y”).
), The count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (A1718), and a payout command corresponding to the target winning number counter area is acquired (A1719). Then, the payout command (payout number command) is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer (A1720), an initial value is set in the payout command transmission timer (A1721), and then the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing transmission intervals, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control apparatus 100 can start the payout control with a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) can start payout control. In this case, a prize ball command transmission means for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means is provided.

As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have the function to do, accurate payout control can be realized.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, since conventional gaming machines require a function for backup,
There was a problem that led to an increase in cost. According to this embodiment, the payout control device 200.
Therefore, accurate payout control can be realized without providing a backup function.

Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Also, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

From the above, the game control is comprehensively performed, and the winning areas provided in the gaming area 32 (the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 37, the third starting winning port 42, the general winning port 35,
Game control means for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of a game ball to the special variable prize winning device 39) (
Game control device 100) and payout control means (payout control device 200) for paying out game balls based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. The game control means is a payout control means. The payout control means that is output from is controlled to transmit a prize ball command to the payout control means based on a status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not payout control can be started. When returning, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means, the prize control command is not immediately sent to the payout control means, and the payout control means performs the payout control. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the continuous output of the status signal indicating that it can be started over a predetermined period.

In addition, a plurality of winning areas (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, third starting winning opening 42, general winning opening 35, special variable winning apparatus 39) having different numbers of winning balls are provided in the game area 32, The game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing game ball payout control is transmitted for each prize ball number. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The status signal specifies whether the payout control means can start payout control before specifying whether there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter. Will be.

In addition, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and a predetermined winning area (first start winning opening 36, second
A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of a game ball to the start winning port 37, the third start winning port 42, the general winning port 35, and the special variable winning device 39); A payout control means (payout control device 200) that controls payout of game balls based on a prize ball command transmitted from the control means, and the game control means outputs the payout control means output from the payout control means. A prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means when the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control can be started indicates that the payout control can be started. And an external information output means (game control) for outputting a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information relating to the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with the prize winning of game balls to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine Device 100); Provided, external information output means, the state signal outputted from the payout control means, the payout control means is that it has to perform output without winning balls signals related to whether or not it is possible to start the dispensing control.

In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives a prize ball command even when a power failure occurs and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when the power failure is restored. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and a prize ball command is issued in response to a state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command and a prize capable of storing information relating to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) is a predetermined prize area (first start prize port 36, second start prize port 37, third start prize). A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the mouth 42, the general prize opening 35, and the special variable prize winning device 39), and one prize ball when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. It is configured to transmit a command to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area. And the prescribed input The game ball is updated at the time of winning the game ball to the area, and the update is performed in response to the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means, so that the number of prize ball commands not transmitted can be stored. The output means accumulates the number of award balls determined to be paid out when a game ball is awarded to a predetermined prize area, and outputs a prize ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. The winning ball signal counter is configured to store information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and is updated at the time of winning a game ball in the predetermined winning area and outputs external information. By updating in accordance with the process of accumulating prize balls by means, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated.

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a winning mouth switch / status monitoring process. The prize opening switch / status monitoring process is executed in step A1308 in the timer interrupt process.

First, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the large winning opening switches 39a (two) in the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 39) (A2001). Then, an illegal & winning monitoring process is performed to monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open (A2002).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other of the large winning opening switches 39a (two) in the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 39) (A2003).
Then, the illegal winning / winning monitoring process for monitoring the illegal winning and detecting the normal winning is executed (A2004).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning port monitoring table corresponding to the start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37 (A2005). Then, an illegal & prize winning monitoring process for monitoring an illegal prize and detecting a normal prize is executed (A2006). Subsequently, a winning opening monitoring table of winning opening switches that can always win is prepared (A2007). In the present embodiment, the winning opening switches that can always win are the winning opening switch 35a, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, and the starting opening 3 switch 42a. The prize opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring is the starting port 1
For example, the switch 36a.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number (
A2008). Subsequently, a start port error monitoring process for monitoring a winning error at the start winning port is executed (A2009). Then, a state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals whose states are to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (A2010). The status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2011). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2012).
.

By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output by the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like (switch abnormality) 1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (shoot ball break error) based on the chute ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. Status scan counter value is 2
Is set to monitor the state (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state based on the payout abnormality status signal (payout error) is set.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2013). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2014).

By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state (glass frame open error) is monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch. When the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (main body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave improper signal (frame radio wave fraud) is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2015). If the error scan counter value is not 0 (A2015)
Is “N”), the winning a prize mouth switch / status monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next.

In addition, the game control apparatus 100 determines that the error scan counter value is 0 (A2
The result of 015 is “Y”), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (A2016), and a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2017).
.

By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the state scan counter value is 0, a state based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch (switch abnormality) 2 error) monitoring is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is 1 to 3.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status (a payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2018). ), The winning prize switch / status monitoring process is terminated.

Note that the processing from step A2016 to A2018 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, so that it is executed once every four timer interrupts. . That is, if a timer interrupt is made every 4 ms, 1
Processing from A2016 to A2018 is performed every 6 ms.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, details of the special game process (A1309) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure game processing. In the special game process, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 42 are displayed.
Monitor the input of a, control the entire process related to the special figure variation display game, and set the special figure display.

The game control apparatus 100 first executes a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring winnings of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 42a (A26).
01). In the starting port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins the first variable winning device 37 that forms the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port, and the third starting winning port 42, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted. The game result prior determination is performed to determine in advance the game result based on the winning in the stage before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the winning. The details of the start port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602).
In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (1
(A2603). The special game process timer is timed by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special figure game process timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2615.

When the special-purpose game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is “
Y "), that is, when the time has expired or when the time has already expired, the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is set in the register (A2605). . Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606).
Subsequently, a subroutine call is made with a special figure game process number, and a game branch process corresponding to the special figure game process number is executed (A2607).

If the game process number is “0” in step A2607, the game control device 100
Monitors the start of fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game, and performs special figure routine processing for setting the start of fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game, setting of effects, setting of information necessary for performing special figure fluctuation processing, etc. Execute (A2608). Details of the special figure routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “1” in step A2607, the game control device 100
The special figure changing process for setting the special figure stop display time and setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display process is executed (A2609). For details of the special figure fluctuation processing, refer to FIG.
2 will be described later.

When the game process number is “2” in step A2607, the game control device 100
If the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, to set the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, the setting of the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, and processing during the fanfare / interval A special figure display process for setting information necessary for the process is executed (A2610). Details of the special figure display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game process number is “3” in step A2607, the game control device 100
A fanfare / inter-interval process is performed for setting the opening time of the special winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, setting information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening (A2611). Details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game process number is “4” in step A2607, the game control device 100
If the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, or the information necessary for performing the winning ball remaining ball processing is set. Medium processing is executed (A2612). Details of the special winning opening open process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “5” in step A2607, the game control device 100
If the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or the processing for setting the necessary winning ball remaining balls for setting the information necessary for the big hit end process, etc. Execute (A2613). For example, in the winning ball remaining ball processing, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special game processing timer area, and the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set to the special game processing number area. Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special figure game process timer area, the process number “6” relating to the big hit end process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

When the game process number is “6” in step A2607, the game control device 100
A special jackpot ending process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure routine process is executed (A
2614). For example, in the jackpot end process, the probability state after the jackpot state end or the power transmission support state after the jackpot state end (based on the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number (big hit symbol number) of the special figure variation display game ( The necessary information such as the time reduction state is set, a process number “0” relating to the special figure normal process is set, and the special figure game process number area is saved. The probability variation judgment data includes the probability state (high probability / low probability) after the jackpot state ends, and the number of continuous games in the power support state (short time state) after the jackpot state ends (time shortening variation count, power support count) ) Information is included.

When the process based on the special figure game process number is completed, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A2615), and then the special figure 1 display. The symbol variation control process according to 51 is executed (A2616). And after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation control table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (A2617), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed (A2618).

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a winning monitoring table for the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and wins the first starting winning opening 36. It is determined whether or not there is (A2703). If there is no winning at the first start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is “N”), the processing after step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not it is during the special drawing time (in the normal power support state) (A2704).

When it is determined that the game control device 100 is not in the special drawing time shortage (in normal power support state) (A
If the result of 2704 is “N”), the processing after step A2707 is executed. On the other hand, if it is in the special drawing time (in the normal power support state) (the result of A2704 is “Y”), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and an effect command setting process is executed ( A2706). In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

That is, in the normal power support state (short-time state), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and an effect command setting process is executed regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game. . In the case of this embodiment, the first start winning opening 36 is not left unless it is left-handed,
The normal variable winning device 37 will not be awarded unless it is right-handed. If the player does not hit right, the game ball does not pass through the normal start gate 34. Accordingly, the right-handed is more advantageous than the left-handed in the power-powered support state (short-time state), but when the first start winning opening 36 is won during the power-powered support state (ie, the power-powered support) In the case of left-handed during the state), a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs notification (warning) instructing right-handed using the display device 41 or the like. .

Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the first start winning port 36 (start port 1) (A2707), and then executes a special-purpose start port switch common process (
A2708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning at the second starting winning opening. Determine (A2711). If there is no winning at the second start winning opening (the result of A2711 is “N”), the processing after step A2716 is executed.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is in operation when there is a prize at the second start prize opening (the result of A2711 is “Y”). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (A2712). When the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is “Y”
), The process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not an ordinary electric power fraud has occurred (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or larger than the number of fraud determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the normal power fraud is occurring. The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Accordingly, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud occurs, and when there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as an illegal winning number. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) when the ordinary electric power fraud has not occurred (the result of A2713 is "N") (A2714) , Special figure starting port switch common processing is executed (A2715), step A2
The process after 716 is executed. In addition, in A2713, a fraudulent power transmission has occurred (A271).
Even if it is determined that the result of 3 is “Y”), the processing from step A2716 onward is executed. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

The game control device 100 prepares a winning monitoring table for the third starting winning port 42 (starting port 3) (A2716), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2717), and the third starting winning port 4
2 (starting port 3) is determined whether or not there is a winning (A2718). If there is no winning at the third start winning opening 42 (the result of A2718 is “N”), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is a winning at the third start winning opening 42 (the result of A2718 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special drawing is being short-running (in the normal power support state) (A2719).

When it is determined that the game control device 100 is not in the special drawing time shortage (in normal power support state) (A
The result of step 2719 is “N”), and the processing after step A2722 is executed. On the other hand, if it is in the special drawing time (in the normal power support state) (the result of A2719 is “Y”), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2720), and an effect command setting process is executed ( A2721).

That is, in the normal power support state (short-time state), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and an effect command setting process is executed regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game. . In the case of the present embodiment, the third start winning opening 42 is not left unless it is left-handed,
The normal variable winning device 37 will not be awarded unless it is right-handed. If the player does not hit right, the game ball does not pass through the normal start gate 34. Therefore, in the power transmission support state (short-time state), right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a winning at the third start winning opening 42 during the power-powered support state (that is, power transmission support) In the case of left-handed during the state), a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs notification (warning) instructing right-handed using the display device 41 or the like. .

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the third start winning port 42 (start port 3) (A2722), and then executes a special-purpose start port switch common process (A2722).
2723), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, hardware random number acquisition processing (A2702, A2710 in the start port switch monitoring processing)
, A2717) will be described in detail. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a procedure of hard random number acquisition processing.

First, the game control device 100 sets start port no-win information indicating that there is no win in the start win port (A2801). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch (A2
802) When there is no input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. The target switch is the start port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process in step A2702, and the start port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number acquisition process in step A2710. In the hard random number acquisition process of step A2717,
This is the start port 3 switch 42a.

When there is an input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is “Y
]), The random number latch register status (the state of the random number latch register) is read, and it is determined whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register (A2803, A2804).
If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.

The game control device 100, when there is latch data in the target random number latch register (A280
The result of 4 is “Y”), and the jackpot random number extracted in the target hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (A2805), and the start opening winning information indicating that there is a winning at the starting winning opening is set. (A2806). The prepared jackpot random number is used in the special figure start port switch common processing.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, special-purpose start-port switch common processing (A2708, A
2715, A2723) will be described in detail. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure start port switch common process. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, or the start port 3 switch 42a.

First, the game control device 100 manages information on the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 42a. The start port signal output count that is the number of outputs to the device is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by 1 (A2902), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (A2903). When the output count does not overflow (A
The result of 2903 is “N”), and the updated value is saved in the start signal output frequency area of the RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2905. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the number of reserved special figures (starting memory number) corresponding to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 42a. Is less than the upper limit value (A2905). If the number of special figure hold to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “N”), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure reservations or the number of special figure 2 reservations) is updated by one. (A2906).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure hold number command (decoration special figure 1 hold number command or decoration special figure 2 hold number command) corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the special figure hold number as an effect command. (A2907) and the effect command setting process is executed (A290).
8). Subsequently, the target start opening winning flag is saved (A2909). In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the number of reserved special figures (A2910), and stores the big hit random number prepared in step A2805 as the big hit random number of the RWM. Save in the area (A2911). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2912), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2913).

Then, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2914). Next, the address of the change order flag storage area corresponding to the total number of the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold is calculated in the RWM (A2915).
) And save the target change order flag in the calculated change order flag storage area (A2916).
). Thereby, the address of the storage area corresponding to any one of the holdings (for example, holdings 1 to 8) is calculated, and the change order flag indicating the change (change display game) in FIG. 1 or 2 is saved. Subsequently, the special figure hold information determination process is executed (A2917), and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls to the start winning area of the first start winning port 36, the third starting winning port 42, and the normal variable winning device 37. A starting storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a starting storage serving as the right to execute the variable display game is provided. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) is a first random number value extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) with a predetermined number as the upper limit.
This is stored as a start memory, and the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning apparatus 37) or the third starting winning opening 4
Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to 2 are stored as the second start memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (A2917) in the start port common process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure hold information determination process.
The special figure hold information determination process is a pre-reading (preliminary determination) process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a low probability determination flag indicating that the determination is a low probability (A3001), and determines whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value (low probability determination value). A pre-fetch jackpot determination process for determining whether or not is true is executed (A3002). Then, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the prefetch jackpot determination process is a jackpot (A3003). When the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3003 is “Y”), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start-up switch is set (A3004), and the stop corresponding to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2912 Acquire symbol information (A3005), Step A
The processing shifts to 3007. On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3003 is “
N "), the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (A3006), and the process proceeds to step A3007.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol information in the symbol information area in the RWM (
A3007). Subsequently, a look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target start opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared as an effect command (A3008), and an effect command setting process is executed (A3009). The prefetch stop symbol command (low probability) indicates stop symbol information determined by the low probability determination value.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high probability determination flag indicating that the determination is a high probability (A3010), and whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value (high probability determination value). A pre-read jackpot determination process for determining whether the jackpot is a hit is executed (A3011). Then, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the prefetch jackpot determination process is a jackpot (A3012). When the determination result is a big hit (result of A3012 is “Y”), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (A3013), and the stop corresponding to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2912 Acquire symbol information (A3014), step A
The process proceeds to 3016. On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3012 is “
N "), the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (A3015), and the process proceeds to step A3016.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is in a high probability state (probability change state, during special figure high probability) (A3016). When it is in a high probability state (the result of A3016 is “Y”), the stopped symbol information is saved in the symbol information area in the RWM (A3017), and the process proceeds to step A3018. When not in a high probability state (result of A3016 is “N”
), The process of step A3017 is not performed, and the process directly proceeds to step A3018.

Thus, in the case of a high probability state, the stop symbol information determined by the high probability determination value is overwritten in the symbol information area and finally saved. On the other hand, when the state is not the high probability state (in the case of the low probability state), the stop symbol information (A3007) determined by the low probability determination value is finally saved in the symbol information area. The stop symbol information finally saved in the symbol information area is used in the prefetching (A3020, A3021) of the variation pattern.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information as a production command (A3018), and executes a production command setting process (A3019). The pre-read stop symbol command (high probability) indicates stop symbol information determined by a high probability determination value. Next, a special pattern information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is executed (A3020), and a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation mode (fluctuation pattern) of the special figure fluctuation display game. (A302
1). The special figure information setting process in step A3020 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A3021 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the fluctuation start process in the special figure ordinary process described later.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number as an effect command (A3022), and executes an effect command setting process (A3).
023), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.

With the above processing, the prefetch stop symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and the prefetch variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are obtained. It is prepared and transmitted to the production control device 300.
As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. Notifying the device 300, in particular, notifying the player of the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure variation display game, for example, by changing the hold display 633 displayed on the display device 41 Is possible.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as start memory in the start memory means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Etc.) Pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

Furthermore, by the above processing, the prefetch determination result (low probability) and the prefetch stop symbol command both of the look-ahead determination result determined as a big hit with a low probability determination value and the look-ahead determination result determined as a big hit with a high probability determination value, respectively. (High probability) is transmitted to the production control device 300.
Thereby, even if the jackpot probability state changes after transmission of the prefetch stop symbol command, the effect control device 300 can execute a prefetch notice (such as a pending change notice) in accordance with the probability state before and after the change.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, details of the special figure routine process (A2608) in the special figure game process will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal processing.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are both 0 (A3301). When both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are 0 (the result of A3301 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A3310. When at least one of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3301 is “N”), the change order corresponding to the hold (hold 1) (oldest hold) that is digested first The variable order flag is loaded from the flag storage area (for the total number of holdings 1) (A3302).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the change order flag indicates the change in the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 change display game) (A3303). When the change order flag indicates the change of the special figure 1 (the result of A3303 is “Y”), the special figure 1 corresponding to the special figure 1 holding number is displayed.
An on-hold number command is prepared as an effect command (A3304), and an effect command setting process is executed (A3305). This decoration special figure hold number command includes information regarding a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current special figure 1 hold number (the special figure 1 hold number after execution of the special figure 1 variable display game to be started). Then, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process for starting the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed (A3306), and the special figure ordinary process is terminated.

Further, when the change order flag does not indicate the change in FIG. 1 (the result of A3303 is “N
”), That is, in the case of indicating the fluctuation of the special figure 2, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number as a production command (A 3307). A setting process is executed (A3308). This decoration special figure hold number command includes information on a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current special figure 2 hold number (the special figure 1 hold number after execution of the special figure 2 variable display game to be started). Then, a special figure 2 fluctuation start process for starting the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3309), and the special figure ordinary process is terminated.

The game control apparatus 100 has a special figure 1 hold number and a special figure 2 hold number that are both 0 (A3301).
Is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (A3310). If the customer waiting demo has already started (the result of A3310 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3315. If the customer waiting demo has not been started (the result of A3310 is “N”), a customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (A3311), and the customer waiting demo command is prepared as a production command (A3312). Command setting processing is executed (A3213)
). Receiving the customer waiting demo command, the effect control device 300 executes the customer waiting demo on the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value in the customer waiting demo elapsed timer area (A33).
14) If the customer waiting demo elapsed timer is not 0, -1 is updated (A3315).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets “0” related to the special figure routine process as the process number (
A3316), the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (A3317). Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A3318), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area in the RWM (A3319), and the special figure routine processing is terminated.

In this way, the change order flag is loaded from the change order flag storage area (for the hold number total 1) corresponding to the hold (hold 1) that is consumed first, and the type of change display game indicated by the change order flag is displayed. (Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Display Game or Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Display Game) is started. In other words, the variable display game is executed in the order in which the winning (starting memory) occurs,
Holds will be digested from the oldest in order of winning.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3306) in the special figure ordinary process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

The game control device 100 saves a special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting shift information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3402). Details of the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3403). In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, the stop symbol number at the time of loss or big hit, and the loss stop symbol pattern or the big hit stop symbol pattern corresponding to this stop symbol number are saved. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared as an effect command, and an effect command setting process is executed. Also, the number-of-rounds information (round upper limit value) corresponding to the stop symbol number and the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number are acquired and saved.

Further, the game control device 100 executes special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3405). ). Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern (variation pattern number) which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a change start information setting process for setting change start information of the special figure 1 change display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 change start process. In the variation start information setting process, a variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and an effect command setting process is performed.

Then, the game control device 100 sets “1” related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3408), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3409).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3410), and saves a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area.
For example, 100 ms) is set (A3413). Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3309) in the special figure ordinary process will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.

First, the game control device 100 executes the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2).
Is saved in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3503). Further, special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, is prepared (A3505).

Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern (variation pattern number) of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). And the fluctuation start information setting process which sets the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507).
.

Next, the game control device 100 first sets “1” related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3508), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3509).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3510), and saves a signal related to the fluctuation start in FIG. 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A3512), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area.
For example, 100 ms) is set (A3513). Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation symbol number area (A3514), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

First, the game control device 100 saves the shift information in the jackpot flag 1 area (A36).
01). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), prepared (A3602), and the special figure one big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to zero. (A3603). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not is executed (A3604).

When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3604) is a big hit (the result of A3605 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit information in the area of the big hit flag 1 in which the loss information is saved in step A3601. Save (A3606) and end the big hit flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3604) is not big hit (A
The result of 3605 is “N”), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated while the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area. Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is either “big hit” or “out of game”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.
In this process, the same process as that in the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 18 is performed on the second start-up memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area (A37).
01). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to zero. (A3703). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not is executed (A3704).

When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is a big hit (the result of A3705 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 overwrites the big hit information in the area of the big hit flag 2 in which the loss information is saved in step A3701. Save (A3706) and end the big hit flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is not big hit (A
If the result of 3705 is “N”), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is either “big hit” or “out of game”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, jackpot determination processing (such as jackpot flag 1 setting processing and jackpot flag 2 setting processing) (
Details of A3604 and A3704) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A3801), and determines whether or not the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3802). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

Game control device 100, when the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A380
2 is “Y”), the determination result is set to a deviation (other than jackpot) (A3807), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

In addition, the game control device 100 determines that the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (A3
The result of 802 is “N”), and it is determined whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is a high probability state (probability variation state) (A3803). If the state is a high probability state (the result of A3803 is “Y”
), An upper limit judgment value with high probability is set (A3804). On the other hand, when the state is not a high probability state (the result of A3803 is “N”), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (A3805).

When the upper limit determination value of the jackpot random number value is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the target jackpot random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3806). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is “Y”), the judgment result is set to a deviation (other than the big hit) (A3807). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A3806 is “N”), and the jackpot is set as the determination result (A3808). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Big hit probability]
FIG. 21 is a table illustrating, for each setting, the jackpot probability and jackpot symbol distribution (breakdown breakdown) of the special figure variation display game controlled by the above-described special figure game processing.

As shown in FIG. 21, the big hit probability at the low probability and the big hit probability at the high probability become higher as the set value becomes larger (high setting), and the big hit is likely to occur, which is advantageous to the player. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit judgment value and the lower limit judgment value in FIG. 20 by the range of the jackpot random number value. The jackpot probability can be changed according to the setting information by changing the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value or the range of the jackpot random number value corresponding to the setting information (setting value). In another example, only one of the jackpot probability at the low probability and the jackpot probability at the high probability may be configured to increase as the set value increases.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure changing process.

First, the game control apparatus 100 uses a symbol stop command (a special symbol 1 symbol stop command or a special symbol 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to a variable symbol discrimination flag (a special symbol 1 variation flag or a special symbol 2 variation flag) as an effect command. Prepare (A4701) and execute the production command setting process (
A4702). Upon receiving the symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the corresponding decoration special figure fluctuation display game (decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game or decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A4703), and saves the set display time in the special-figure game processing timer area (A4704). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol pattern, 800 msec is set as the display time, and when the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, the display time is set at 2000 msec. When transmitting the display time information to the effect control device 300, a display time command corresponding to the display time may be prepared, and the effect command setting process may be executed for the display time command. The display time command in this case is a kind of symbol stop command (B1319 in FIG. 35 described later). A
The processing order of 4702 and A4703 may be switched, and the symbol stop command may be transmitted to the effect control device 300 including the display time information.

Next, the game control device 100 sets a process number “2” related to the special figure display process (A4).
705), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A4706).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves the signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 in the test signal output data area (A4707). A4708).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) in a symbol determination frequency signal control timer area used when outputting a symbol determination frequency signal related to the number of executions of the special symbol variable display game to the external information terminal. Is saved (A4709).

After that, the game control device 100 sets a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 as the special figure 1 variable display game control information on the special figure 1 display 51. (A4710). Further, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A4711). Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (A2610) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure display processing.

The game control device 100 first has a jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and a jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. Are loaded (A4801), RWM jackpot flag 1
The area and the big hit flag 2 area are cleared (A4802).

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A4803), and if it is a big hit (the result of A4803 is “Y”), the big hit of the second special figure variable display game Test signal related to the start of (Special figure 2 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is on, the accessory continuous actuator operating signal is on, the special symbol 2 signal is on) in the test signal output data area of the RWM Save (A4811) and set the round number upper limit value table (A4812).

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is not a big hit as a result of checking the big hit flag 2 (
The result of A4803 is “N”), and it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (
A4804), if it is a big hit (the result of A4804 is “Y”), a test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, The continuous operation device operating signal is turned on and the signal per special symbol is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A4805), and processing for setting the round number upper limit value table is executed (A4812).

When the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (the result of A4804 is “N
”), A high probability variation number update process, which is a process for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in a high probability state (A4806). Then, as the process number, “0” related to the special process
Is set (A4807), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (A480).
8) The variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A4809). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A4810), and the special figure display in-process is terminated.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets the round number upper limit value (
In the case of the present embodiment, 16 or 6) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (A4813). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A4814).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sends a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern to RW.
Load from M decoration special drawing command area, prepare as production command (A4815),
The effect command setting process is executed (A4816). After that, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of a hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game to be a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared as an effect command (A4817). Setting processing is executed (A4818). Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the presence / absence of the sitting one-shot effect execution flag set in the special figure information setting process and the round number upper limit value is prepared as an effect command (A4819), and the effect command setting process is executed. (A4820).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a fanfare time corresponding to the presence / absence of a sitting one-shot effect execution flag (A4821), and clears the sitting one-shot effect execution flag (A482).
2). For example, the fanfare time is 1 when there is no sitting one-off production execution flag.
0000 ms is set, and if there is a sitting one-off production execution flag, 100 ms is set.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 10000 ms)
c) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A4823). Then, the winning prize mouth illegal winning number area is cleared (A4824), and the illegal winning period fraud monitoring period flag area is saved (A4825). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 is executed (A4826), and the special figure display process is terminated. In other words, the special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special variable winning device 39 to the open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game. Special gaming state generating means for generating a state is provided. For example, in the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1, a process number “3” related to the fanfare / interval process is set and saved in the special game process number area.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (A2611) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing.

First, the game control device 100 updates the number of rounds in the special gaming state by +1 (A5701).
Then, a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state (big hit state) is prepared as an effect command (A5702), and an effect command setting process (A5703) is performed.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the special prize opening time (for example, 29 seconds) in the special game process timer area (A5704), and sets the process number to “4” related to the special prize opening process ( A5705), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A5706).
. Thereafter, a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5707), and the number of winning prizes for the special winning opening is stored. The information of the mouth count number area is cleared (A5708). Then, the ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A5709), and the processing during the fanfare / interval is ended.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, the details of the special prize opening process (A2612) in the special game process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening process of the present embodiment.

The game control device 100 first determines the current round number and RW in the special game state being executed.
The round number upper limit value in the M round number upper limit area is compared to determine whether the current round is the final round (A5901). If it is not the final round (result of A5901 is “N”), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared as an effect command (A5902), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5904).

In the case of the final round (result of A5901 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares an ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special gaming state as an effect command (A5903). Execute the production command setting process (
A5904).

Thereafter, the processing number is set to “5” related to the winning ball remaining ball processing (A5905), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area (A5906). Residual sphere processing time (for example, 1.
9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A5907), and then off data for turning off the big prize opening solenoid 39b is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (A5908), and the big prize opening is being opened. End the process.

[Normal game processing]
Next, the details of the normal game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal game process. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, and the overall process related to the usual figure display game is controlled.
Set the display of the usual figure.

First, the game control device 100 executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A7601).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a general power prize switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the start port 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the usual game processing timer is not 0 (1
(A7603). Note that the minimum value of the normal game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal game process timer has become 0 (A7604).

When the value of the usual game process timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control apparatus 100 sets the ordinary game process number. A general game sequence branch table to be referred to branch to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number based on the set ordinary game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call based on the usual game process number is performed to execute a game branching process corresponding to the usual game process number (A7607).

When the game process number is “0” in step A7607, the game control device 100
Monitors the start of fluctuation of the normal-variable display game, and performs the normal-routine normal processing for setting the start of the fluctuation of the normal-variable display game, setting the effects, and setting the information necessary to perform the process during the normal-fluctuation change. Execute (A7608). Details of the routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, when the game process number is “1” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a process for changing the normal map for setting information necessary for performing the process for displaying the normal map ( A7609). Details of the processing during normal map change will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, when the game process number is “2” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the current state of the time-variable display game is successful or not. The processing for displaying a normal map for setting the opening time, setting of information necessary for performing the processing for the normal map, etc. is executed (A7610). Details of the process for displaying the normal map will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, when the game process number is “3” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the information necessary to continue the process during the normal drawing or to perform the remaining electric ball process. The middle processing is executed per figure (A7611). 3
0 will be described later.

In addition, when the game process number is “4” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes the general electric ball remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing the end process for the normal map (A7612). ).

In addition, when the game process number is “5” in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal figure end process for setting information necessary for performing the normal figure normal process (A7608). (A7613).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal figure fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the normal symbol by the normal figure indicator 53 (A7614). Thereafter, the symbol variation control process related to the control of the variation of the normal symbol by the ordinary symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the ordinary symbol game process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the usual game process timer is not 0 (A7604)
Is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the processing after step A7614 is executed.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure routine process (A7608) in the usual figure game process will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the routine of routine processing.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of reserved drawings is 0 (A7901).
. If the number of reserved symbols is not 0 (the result of A7901 is “N”), a random number is loaded from the random number storage area per RWM (for the number of reserved numbers 1), and the random number storage area per RWM (
Load random number per symbol from the reserved number 1) and clear the random number storage area per symbol (for reserved number 1) and the regular symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) after loading (A7902) . Furthermore, whether or not the probability of a hit result in the normal map display game is higher than normal (high probability state), that is, whether or not it is in a short time state (normal power support state) Is determined (A7903). The probability per ordinary figure during the high probability is 250/251, and the probability per ordinary figure during the low probability is 0/251.

The game control apparatus 100 sets a low probability lower limit determination value (here, 251), which is a lower limit determination value during the general low probability, when the normal probability is not high (the result of A7903 is “N”) (A7904).
), When the normal probability is high (the result of A7903 is “Y”), the high probability lower limit determination value (here, 1), which is the lower limit determination value in the normal probability, is set (A7905), and step A7906 Move on to processing.

The game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A7906). Note that the upper limit judgment value here is common between the high probability of ordinary figures and the low probability of ordinary figures. If the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7906 is “Y”), that is,
In the case of deviation, the process proceeds to step A7908. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7906 is “N”), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A7907).

The game control device 100 determines that the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7907 is “
Y "), that is, in the case of a loss, the shift information is saved in the hit flag area (A7908).
. Further, the stop symbol number is set as the normal symbol stop symbol number (A7909), the off symbol information is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (A7910), and the process proceeds to step A7914.

The game control device 100 determines that the winning random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7907 is “
N ”), that is, in the case of winning, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (A7911), the hit stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded hit symbol random number is set (A7912), and the hit corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is set. The stop symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. There may be several types of hit stop symbols, and there are two in the present embodiment.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the general symbol stop symbol area (A791).
4) The stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A7915), the random number storage area per ordinary figure is shifted (A7916), and the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (A7917).
), The number of reserved drawings is updated by -1 (A7918).

That is, with the execution of the usual figure change display game relating to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved drawings that are on hold after the number 1 of reserved maps are incremented one by one.
As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one.

Next, the game control device 100 extracts the variation pattern random number 3 (A7919), sets the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the usual game process timer area (A7).
920). For example, the variation time is 500 msec with a probability of 200/256 and a probability of 40/25.
6 is 1500 msec and probability 16/256 is assigned to 3000 msec. Then, the process for setting the transition to the normal process is executed (A7921), and the normal process is terminated. In the process of setting changes in the normal map, in order to shift to the process of changing the normal map, the game process number is set to “1” and saved in the normal game process number area, and the normal map change time is set to the normal level. Save in the game processing timer area.

In addition, the game control device 100 determines that the number of pending reservations is 0 (the result of A7901 is “
Y ")," 0 "is set as the process number for shifting to the normal process (A7922),
The processing number is saved in the usual game processing number area (A7923). Thereafter, the flag for fraud monitoring period is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (A7924), and the normal processing is terminated.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the process during normal map change (A7609) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during normal map change.

First, the game control apparatus 100 sets the process number to “2” as a setting process for shifting to the process for displaying a normal diagram (A8301), and saves the process number in the general game process number area (
A8302). After that, the game control device 100 saves the normal time display time (for example, 0.6 seconds), which is the display time of the result of the normal time variable display game on the normal time display, in the normal time game processing timer area (A8303). .

Further, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the end of the normal change (normal symbol 1 changing signal is OFF) in the test signal output data area (A8304). Then, a stop flag indicating that the usual figure fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the usual figure fluctuation control flag area (A8).
305), the process during normal map change is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process for displaying a normal map (A7610) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal map display process.

First, the game control device 100 loads a hit flag (hit information or out-of-game information) set in the normal processing (A8401), and clears the RWM hit flag area (A84).
02). Then, it is determined whether or not hit information is set for the loaded hit flag (A8403).

When the hit information is set for the hit flag, the game control apparatus 100 (A8403).
Result is “Y”), the hit processing setting table is set (A8404), the hit start pointer value (0 or 5 in this case) corresponding to the usual drawing stop symbol information is acquired, and the hitting control pointer area during the usual drawing (A8405). Also, a hit end pointer value (4 or 7 in this case) corresponding to the normal stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the end stop area for the normal stop (A8406).
). Next, the open time corresponding to the general map stop symbol information (for example, 1700 msec or 2
600 msec) is acquired and saved in the usual game process timer area (A8407). With the above processing, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 37 in the short time state is set, and for example, it can be opened three times or twice.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets “3” as the process number for shifting to the normal process per game.
Is set (A8408), and the process number is saved in the usual game process number area (A840).
9). After that, a signal related to the hit of the normal figure change display game (normal signal is turned on per 1 symbol)
Then, a signal related to the start of normal electric operation (normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A8410). Further, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the ordinary electric solenoid, the ON data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area (A8411).
.

Further, the game control device 100 clears the information in the ordinary power count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 (A8412), and the number of winnings to the ordinary variation winning device 37 in the normal power fraud monitoring period is obtained. The stored information on the ordinary electric power illegal winnings area is cleared (A8413). Finally, a flag that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (A8414).

The game control device 100 determines that the hit information is not set in the hit flag (A840).
The result of 3 is “N”), and “0” is set as the processing number for shifting to the normal processing (A
8415), the processing number is saved in the usual game processing number area (A8416). after that,
The fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (A8417), and the normal display processing is terminated.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the normal game hitting process (A7611) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process for hitting the common map.

First, the game control device 100 loads and prepares a control pointer during a normal game (A860).
1) It is determined whether or not the value of the loaded normal control pointer per normal map has reached the value of the normal control pointer upper limit value area per normal map (the hit end value) (A8602).

When the value of the control pointer during the normal map does not reach the value of the upper limit value area of the control pointer during the normal map (the result of A8602 is “N”), the game control device 100 performs the control during the normal map. The pointer is updated by +1 (A8603). In addition, the normal operation transition setting process is executed (A
8604), the process during the normal drawing is terminated. In the normal power operation transition setting process, the normal power solenoid 3
While controlling on / off of 7c, it acquires the wait time and the open time of the normal train and saves them in the normal game processing timer area.

In addition, when the value of the control pointer during the normal figure reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal figure (the value of the end of hit) (the result of A8602 is “Y”), Without executing the process for updating (+1) the normal process control pointer area in step A8603, the normal operation transition setting process is executed (A8604), and the normal process in normal map is terminated.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the external information editing process. FIG. 31A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 31B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, the start port error monitoring process (A2009), the payout command transmission process (A13)
05), winning prize switch / status monitoring process (A1308), magnet fraud monitoring process (A1312)
), Processing for creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device based on the monitoring result in the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing (A1313), and setting the output buffer, etc. I do.

The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (
A9501). If a switch error is occurring (A9501 result is “N”)
The off data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9502).
). If a switch abnormality error is occurring (the result of A9501 is “Y”), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9503).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (
A9504). When a glass frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9504 is “N”),
It is determined whether or not a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9505).
. When the body frame opening error is not occurring (result of A9505 is “N”), the door / frame opening signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (A9506), and the security signal OFF data is external information output data. Save in the area (A9507).

When the glass frame opening error is occurring (result of A9504 is “Y”) or when the main body frame opening error is occurring (result of A9505 is “Y”).
The ON data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9508), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9509).

After steps A9507 and A9509, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A9510), and determines whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time is up). Determine (A9511). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like (A1029 of the main process).
). The security signal control timer is counted from the RAM initialization time.

When the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9511 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the security signal ON data in the external information output data area (A
9512), the process proceeds to step A9513. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9511 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not a magnet fraud is occurring (A9513). In addition, when a magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area, it can be determined that a magnet fraud is occurring. If the magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A9513 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (A9514). If the board radio fraud flag is saved in the board radio fraud flag area, it can be determined that the board radio fraud is occurring.

The gaming control device 100 has no board radio wave fraud (the result of A9514 is “N”).
Further, it is determined whether or not a big prize opening fraud is occurring (A9515). It should be noted that if the illegal prize occurrence flag for the big prize opening is saved in the illegal flag area, it can be determined that the big prize opening fraud is occurring. If the winning prize fraud is not occurring (the result of A9515 is “
N "), and further, it is determined whether or not a normal power fraud is occurring (A9516). If the power transmission fraud has not occurred (the result of A9516 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a start-up port error has occurred (A9517). It should be noted that when the error occurrence flag is saved in the start port error flag area, it can be determined that the start port error is occurring. When the start port error is not occurring (A
The result of 9517 is “N”), and it is further determined whether or not fraudulent radio waves are occurring (A9).
518).

On the other hand, the game control apparatus 100 determines that the magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A9513 is “Y
)), When a radio wave fraud is occurring (result of A9514 is “Y”), when a prize winning fraud is occurring (result of A9515 is “Y”), or when a fraudulent power transmission is occurring (A9516
Is “Y”), or when a start-up port error is occurring (A9517 result is “Y”)
, Save ON data of gaming machine error status signal in test signal output data area (A951)
9). After that, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (A
9520), main prize ball signal editing processing for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out is executed (A9521).

The game control apparatus 100 also determines that the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9518 is “N”).
), Main prize ball signal editing processing is executed (A9521). Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 executes a start port signal editing process for editing the start port winning signal (A9522).

Next, the game control device 100 updates −1 if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variable display game is not 0 (A9523). Note that the minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to zero.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (A9524). When the value of the symbol determination count control timer is 0 (the result of A9524 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination count signal is output as external information output data. The area is saved (A9525), and the external information editing process is terminated.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the value of the symbol determination number control timer is not 0 (A952
4 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the on data of the symbol determination number signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9526), and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which the production | presentation control apparatus 300 performs with the program for production control is demonstrated.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG.
These are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the step code (number) is represented as “B ***”.

When the execution of the main process is started, the production control device 300 first prohibits interruption (
B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, BDP
0003), interrupt is permitted (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, the game control device 1
A command reception interrupt process for receiving a command transmitted from 00 is enabled.

Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 and the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (B0).
008). The WDT is activated by the above-described CPU initial setting (B0002), and the CPU 311
Monitor whether is working properly. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B0009). continue,
A hall / player setting mode process for receiving an operation such as a change in brightness or volume of the LED or liquid crystal by the player is executed (B0010). In the hall / player setting mode process, the player can customize the production according to the production points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B0011), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes a corresponding received command check process. (B0012). Details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect display editing processing for updating various data in accordance with the content displayed on the display device 41 or the like, or setting a drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. (B0013). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within a frame period of 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 msec). Then, drawing drawing preparation to the display frame buffer is completed and drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B00).
14).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is a frame switching timing (B
0014). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0015 is “N”), the process of B0015 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0015 is “Y”), the display to the display device 41 is performed. Instructs screen drawing (B0
016). Since the frame period of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when a periodic V blank (image update) every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame period) is executed twice, the frame is switched. . The interval may be further increased without updating the image in 1/60 seconds.

In addition, the production control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0017).

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) made of LEDs or the like (B0018). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0019). In the movable body control process, for example, a solenoid is driven to execute an accessory action effect.

And the production | presentation control apparatus 300 returns to the process of B0008, after finishing the process of the above-mentioned B0019. Thereafter, the processing from B0008 to B0019 is repeated.

[Received command check processing]
Next, details of the received command check process (B0012) in the main process (FIG. 32) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). When the command reception number is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control apparatus 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to be analyzed, and the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the command reception number is not 0, that is, if the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 has a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value for the number of received commands (B1103
) The content of the received command buffer in the RAM is copied to the command area for analysis (B11).
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of received commands is subtracted before the contents in the buffer are copied to the command area. Even if a new command is received during copying, the data is not overwritten.

Then, the production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 (adds 1 only) in the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The received command buffer stores the received command 32.
It is configured to store up to. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command reading indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read in the index order and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106). If the copying is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N ]), The process from step B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100, the contents of the received command are stored in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the reception command buffer, analysis of received commands is performed separately in a command area for analysis. When the contents of the received command are copied to the analysis command area, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of command reception by always ensuring a free area without directly analyzing in the reception command buffer.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300, when copying is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y
], The received command contents in the command area for analysis are loaded (B1107), and a received command analysis process for analyzing the contents is executed (B1108). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110). If the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is “N”), step The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 33) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 shows the production control device 30.
7 is a flowchart showing a procedure of received command analysis processing executed by 0;

The effect control apparatus 300 first separates the received command as the MODE part and the lower byte as the ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 are the MODE section (MODE command) and A
It is composed of a CTION part (ACTION command) and is normally transmitted continuously from the MODE part indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower order of the received command is M
The ODE section and the ACTION section are configured in this order.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion is in the normal range (B12).
02). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value that can be taken by the MODE portion indicating the type of command (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). If the MODE portion is in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION portion is in the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the contents of the command (specific production instruction or the like) (value assigned as the command specification indicating the contents). If the ACTION part is in the normal range (B1203
Is “Y”), it is further determined whether or not the ACTION section for the MODE section is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is “Y”), command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE portion is within the range of the variable command (B1205). The variation command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the decorative special symbol, and there is a variation command (set by variation start information setting processing). If the MODE portion represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable command processing is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a variable command, the effect control device 300 (B12
The result of 05 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE portion is within the range of the jackpot command (
B1207). The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation related to the effect during the jackpot (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen). For example, a fanfare command (A4819), a round command (A5702), an interval command (A
5902), an ending command (A5903), and the like. If the MODE portion represents a jackpot command (the result of B1207 is “Y”), the jackpot command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

The production control device 300 (B1) when the MODE unit does not represent the jackpot command.
The result of 207 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE portion is within the range of the symbol system command (
B1209). Note that the symbol-related commands include decorative special symbol commands (set in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. If the MODE part represents a symbolic command (the result of B1209 is “Y”), symbolic command processing is executed (B
1210), the received command analysis process is terminated.

The production control device 300 (B12) when the MODE unit does not represent a symbol-type command.
The result of 09 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is in the range of the single-shot command (B
1211). If the MODE portion represents a single command (result of B1211 is “Y”), single command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a single-shot command, the effect control device 300 (B12
11 is “N”), it is then determined whether or not the MODE portion is within the range of the pre-read symbol system command (B1213). The pre-read symbol command includes a pre-read stop symbol command (A3 in FIG. 14).
008, A3018). If the MODE part represents a pre-read symbol system command (the result of B1213 is “Y”), a pre-read symbol system command process is executed (B1214),
The received command analysis process ends.

The production control device 300 (in the case where the MODE unit does not represent the pre-read symbol system command (
Next, the result of B1213 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE portion is within the range of the prefetch fluctuation command (B1215). The prefetch variation command includes a prefetch variation pattern command (A
3022). When the MODE part represents a look-ahead variation system command (B12
The result of 15 is “Y”), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch fluctuation command (result of B1215 is “N”), the production control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Further, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (result of B1202 is “N”), when the ACTION part is not in the normal range (result of B1203 is “N”), or AC for the MODE part
Even when the TION part is not a correct combination (the result of B1204 is “N”), the received command analysis process ends.

[Single command processing]
Next, the details of the single command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 34) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a procedure of single-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE portion represents a model designation command (the result of B1301 is “Y”), a model setting process for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B
1302), the single command processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a model designation command, the production control device 300 (B1
The result of 301 is “N”), and next, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). If the MODE portion represents a RAM initialization command, (B1
The result of 303 is “Y”), and RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization is executed (
B1304), the single command processing is terminated.

The production control device 300 (when the MODE section does not represent a RAM initialization command)
The result of B1303 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a command at the time of power failure recovery (B1305). And when the MODE part indicates a command for power failure recovery (
The result of B1305 is “Y”), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the one-shot system command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a command at the time of power failure recovery (
The result of B1305 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307). When the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (B1
The result of 307 is “Y”), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a customer waiting demo command, the production control device 300 (B
The result of 1307 is “N”), and then the MODE unit displays the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (A2907).
, A3304) is determined (B1309). If the MODE portion represents a decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is “Y”), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310), and the one-shot command processing ends.

When the MODE section does not represent the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (result of B1309 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 then displays the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (A2).
907, A3307) is determined (B1311). If the MODE portion represents a decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is “Y”), a special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B1312), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the probability information command. (B1313). If the MODE part represents a probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is “Y”), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a probability information command, the production control device 300 (B1
Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion represents an error / invalid command (B1315). Examples of error / illegal commands include a fraud command, a fraud cancel command, a status off command, and a status on command. And MO
When the DE part represents an error / unauthorized command (the result of B1315 is “Y”), an error / unauthorized setting process for notifying or canceling the error or the unauthorized is executed (B1316),
End single-shot command processing.

When the MODE unit does not represent an error / unauthorized command (result of B1315 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit represents a command for effect mode switching. Determination is made (B1317). If the MODE section represents a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is “Y”), the effect mode switching setting process is executed (B1).
318), the single command processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a count command, the production control device 300 (B
The result of 1319 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE portion represents a symbol stop command (B1319). Note that the symbol stop command includes, for example, the symbol stop command shown in FIG. 1 and the symbol stop command shown in FIG. If the MODE portion represents a symbol stop command (the result of B1319 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the command of the MODE portion is a normal command ( B1320).

When the command of the MODE part is a normal command (the result of B1320 is “Y”)
The production control device 300 sets the corresponding special figure stop mode (B1321), sets the gaming state flag to the normal state after all symbols stop (B1322), and ends the one-shot command processing. In the process of B1322, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state, but depending on the timing at which this process is executed, the game state flag is a flag of “fluctuating”, “big hit”, “small hit” Is set.

On the other hand, when the MODE section does not represent a symbol stop command (the result of B1319 is “N
") Or when the command of the MODE part is not normal (the result of B1320 is" N ")
In this case, the production control device 300 ends the single command processing.

In the single command processing, when the MODE part represents a setting information command,
The setting information (setting value) regarding the gaming conditions of the gaming machine 10 included in the setting information command is stored in the RAM.
You may perform the process memorize | stored in.

[Special Figure 1 Hold Information Setting Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 36A, the details of the special figure 1 hold information setting process (B1310) in the single-shot command process (FIG. 35) described above will be described. FIG. 36A shows the production control device 30.
7 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 1 hold information setting processing executed by 0. FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether there is an abnormality in the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (first start memory number information) (B1401a). That is, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the decoration special figure 1 holding number (first start memory number) acquired from the decoration special figure 1 holding number command. For example, if the number of hold of the special figure 1 is increased or decreased by 2 or more at a time, the number of the special figure 1 hold and the number of the special figure 2 hold do not increase alternately in the normal gaming state, If it increases, decorative figure 1
A special figure 1 hold number command (first) is received when, for example, only a prefetch command (prefetch symbol command or prefetch fluctuation command) related to special figure 1 is received without receiving a hold number command.
It can be determined that there is an abnormality in the starting memory number information. Missing decorative special figure 1 hold number command can cause such anomalies. Note that the first start winning opening 36 is received by the winning switching mechanism 105.
When the winnings are alternately received at the third start winning opening 42, the number of holding the special figure 1 and the number of holding the special figure 2 are alternately increased.

When there is an abnormality in the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command, the effect control device 300 (B1401a
Is "Y"), the special figure 1 hold number command abnormality flag is set (B1402a), and the special figure 1
The special figure 1 hold number acquired from the hold number command is stored (B1403a). If the special figure 1 hold number cannot be acquired from the abnormal decoration special figure 1 hold number command, the process of B1403a need not be executed. If there is no abnormality in the special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1401a is "N"), the special figure 1 hold acquired from the special figure 1 hold number command without setting the special figure 1 hold number command abnormality flag The number is stored (B1403a). Thereafter, the special figure 1 hold information setting process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Hold Information Setting Process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 36B, the details of the special figure 2 hold information setting process (B1312) in the single-shot command process (FIG. 35) described above will be described. FIG. 36B shows the production control device 30.
7 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 2 hold information setting processing executed by 0. FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether there is an abnormality in the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (second start memory number information) (B1401b). That is, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the decoration special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) acquired from the decoration special figure 2 holding number command. For example, if the number of decorations special figure 2 hold increases or decreases by 2 or more at a time, the number of decorations special figure 2 hold and the number of decoration special figure 2 hold do not increase alternately in the normal gaming state, If it increases, the decorative figure 2
A special special figure 2 hold number command (second) is received when only a prefetch command related to special figure 2 (a prefetch symbol type command or a prefetch fluctuation type command) is received.
It can be determined that there is an abnormality in the starting memory number information. The special figure 2 hold number command missing can cause such an abnormality. Note that the first start winning opening 36 is received by the winning switching mechanism 105.
When the winnings are alternately received at the third start winning opening 42, the number of holding the special figure 1 and the number of holding the special figure 2 are alternately increased.

When there is an abnormality in the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command, the effect control device 300 (B1401b)
Is “Y”), the decoration special figure 2 hold number command abnormality flag is set (B1402b), and the special figure 2 hold number acquired from the decoration special figure 2 hold number command is stored (B1403b). In addition,
If the special figure 2 hold number cannot be acquired from the abnormal decoration special figure 2 hold number command, B1403
It is not necessary to execute the process b. When there is no abnormality in the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (B140
When the result of 1b is “N”), the special figure 2 hold number command acquired from the special figure 2 hold number command error flag is stored (B1403b). after that,
The special figure 2 hold information setting process is terminated.

[Pre-reading design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, details of the pre-read symbol system command process (B1214) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 34) described above will be described. FIG. 37 shows the production control device 30.
10 is a flowchart showing a procedure of prefetch symbol system command processing executed by 0;

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest hold information is information on special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the decoration special figure hold number command received latest is the decoration special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether it is a command (B1601). When the latest reserved information is information on special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is “Y”), a prefetch symbol type command (prefetch stop symbol command) is displayed in the special figure 1 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure ones on hold. Save (B1602).

In the production control device 300, when the latest hold information is not the information on the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is “N”), that is, the latest special figure hold number command received is the special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the pre-read symbol system command (pre-read stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 pre-read symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number (B1603).

The effects control device 300 sets a prefetch fluctuation command reception waiting flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a prefetch fluctuation command after steps B1602 and B1603 (B160).
4). This is because the prefetch symbol command and the prefetch variation command are set, so that the game controller 100 transmits the prefetch variation command following the prefetch symbol command. Thereafter, the look-ahead design command processing is terminated.

[Read-ahead variation command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the details of the prefetch fluctuation command process (B1216) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 34) described above will be described. FIG. 38 shows the production control device 30.
10 is a flowchart showing a procedure of prefetch fluctuation command processing executed by 0;

The effect control device 300 first determines whether there is a pending number command abnormality flag of the corresponding special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) (B1701). The hold number command abnormality flag of the corresponding special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is set by the special figure 1 hold information setting process (FIG. 36A) or the special figure 2 hold information setting process (FIG. 36B). is there. If there is no corresponding special-pending number command abnormality flag (the result of B1701 is “N”), the processing after step B1703 is executed, and the prefetch fluctuation command (that is, the prefetch (preliminary judgment) judgment result) is obtained. Prefetching based on (
A lottery and setting a notice effect).

When there is a holding number command abnormality flag of the corresponding special figure (decorative special figure 1 or decorative special figure 2) (result of B1701 is “Y”), the production control device 300, that is, the corresponding special figure holding number command When there is an abnormality, it is determined whether or not the starting memory number (number of starting memories) indicated by the hold number command (starting memory number information) is equal to or less than the upper limit number (B1702). In the present embodiment, the upper limit number is four. If the number is less than the upper limit (the result of B1702 is “Y”), step B
The processing after 1703 is executed, and pre-reading effects based on the pre-reading variation commands are selected and set. In this way, even if there is an abnormality in the hold number command of the corresponding special figure, if the start memory number (hold number) indicated by the hold number command is less than or equal to the upper limit number, the prefetch effect is executed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the frequency of executing the pre-reading effect is reduced due to an abnormality.

On the other hand, the production control device 300, when the start memory number (holding number) indicated by the holding number command of the corresponding special figure exceeds the upper limit number (4 in the present embodiment) (the result of B1702 is “N”). The pre-reading fluctuating command processing is terminated without setting a pre-reading effect (notice effect) based on the pre-reading fluctuating command (that is, the determination result of prefetching (preliminary determination)).

If the start memory number (hold number) indicated by the corresponding hold number command of the special figure exceeds the upper limit (the result of B1702 is “N”), the pre-reading effect currently being executed is optionally canceled. (B1717). Here, the prefetch effects include a continuous notice effect, a prefetch zone effect, a pending change notice, etc. All prefetch effects that are currently being executed may be canceled, or some of the prefetch effects that are currently being executed are canceled. May be.

As processing after step B1703, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is waiting to receive a prefetch fluctuation command (B1703). When the above-mentioned prefetch fluctuation system command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the prefetch fluctuation system command is waiting to be received. If it is not waiting to receive the prefetch fluctuation command (the result of B1703 is “N”), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated. When waiting for reception of a prefetch fluctuation command, the result of B1703 is “Y”, and the prefetch fluctuation command reception wait flag is cleared (B1704).

Next, the production control device 300 (sub-board) displays the latest reserved information (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2).
A pre-reading variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of pending items is set (B1705), and an in-sub-prefetching variation command MODE portion is obtained corresponding to the MODE portion of the prefetching variation command (
B1706). Next, a pre-reading variation ACT conversion table is set (B1707), and the sub-prefetching variation command ACT corresponding to the ACTION portion (ACT portion) of the prefetch variation-related command is set.
Part is acquired (B1708).

Next, the effect control apparatus 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the sub-in-prefetch variation command MODE part and ACT part) are other than 0 (B1709).
. If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0. MODE section after conversion, A
When both CT parts are other than 0 (result of B1709 is “Y”), the converted MODE part and A
The converted command composed of the CT section is saved in the latest hold information and the prefetch fluctuation command area (Special Figure 1 prefetch fluctuation command area or Special Figure 2 prefetch fluctuation command area) corresponding to the number of holds (B1710). Then, a prefetch command consistency check process is executed (B171).
1) It is determined whether or not the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (B1712).
).

Note that the time of the first half change corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of holds when the hold starts the variable display game. When the hold starts the variable display game, if there is no other hold, the first half of the change will be long, and if a new hold occurs and the number of holds is large, the first half of the change will be short. Therefore, the MODE part of the received prefetch fluctuation command is converted into the sub-internal prefetch fluctuation command MODE part so that the internal command of the effect control apparatus 300 can be handled in the same manner even if the time value of the first half fluctuation changes.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holds, the latter half fluctuation corresponding to the sub-in-prefetch fluctuation command ACT part does not depend on the number of holds. However, because there are different types of reach in the same system,
The effect control device 30 is not converted without converting the ACT part (the value of the second half fluctuation) of the prefetch fluctuation command.
If 0 is used as it is, the number increases and it becomes difficult to check. For example, for normal reach,
There are types such as a normal reach-1 stop failure and a normal reach + 1 stop failure.
Therefore, by converting the ACT unit indicating the reach of the same system to the same sub-subread pre-reading variation command ACT unit, the number is reduced, and the load of check processing such as pre-read command consistency check processing is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300, when at least one of the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the sub-in-prefetch variation command MODE part and ACT part) is 0 (the result of B1709 is “N”), or When the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (B171
If the result of 2 is “N”), it is determined that there is an abnormality in the converted command, and the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated.

When the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (B
The result of 1712 is “Y”), and the pre-read lottery process related to the latest pre-read effect is executed (
B1713). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest pending prefetch notice effect is generated (B17).
14). The prefetching notice effect is a kind of prefetching effect, and is, for example, a hold change notice (hold change notice effect). Examples of the pre-reading effects include a continuous notice effect, a prefetch zone effect, and a pending change notice.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the prefetching notice effect that occurs is an effect that immediately starts (B1715). An effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pending change notice.
When the pre-reading notice effect to be generated is an effect that starts immediately (result of B1715 is “Y”)
The display corresponding to the selected prefetch effect is set (B1716). Then, the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated.

On the other hand, the production control device 300 does not generate the latest pending prefetch notice production (B171).
4 result is “N”) or the pre-reading notice effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (
The result of B1715 is “N”). The prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the details of the symbol system command process (B1210) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 34) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbolic command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 receives the received symbol-type command (decoration special figure 1 command or decoration special figure 2
The special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of (command) is set (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. And the MODE part and ACTION part (ACT
Part) is set and the symbol type is saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180).
2). Here, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, since the symbol distribution ratio changes, a symbol type is set using a table for each MODE. In addition, for example, the symbol type is an off symbol or 5R.
Corresponds to the probability variation jackpot symbol, 5R normal jackpot symbol, 16R probability jackpot symbol, 16R normal jackpot symbol.

[Variable command processing]
Next, details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 34) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable command process executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control apparatus 300 receives the special map type (special map 1) of the received variable command (variable command).
Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2) is unconfirmed (B1901). When the special figure type is unconfirmed (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is “N”), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether or not the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, the term “inconsistency” means that there is a contradiction in performing an effect, for example, when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received while a variation command of a deviation is received. When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is “Y”)
Then, the variable command processing is terminated.

When the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (result of B1903 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1).
904), a variation effect setting process for setting a variation effect which is a variation effect is executed (B19).
05). There are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, a special state change is set to the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-read effects such as continuous effects is not 0, -1 is updated (B1907).

[Variation production setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the details of the variation effect setting processing (B1905) in the above-described variation command processing (FIG. 40) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the changing effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is a reachless variation (a variation that does not reach a reach state) (B2001). When the variation pattern type is unreachable variation (result of B2001 is “Y”), the first half notice group address table corresponding to the number of points, model code, special figure type, and production mode is set (B2002), and the variation The address of the first half notice allocation group table corresponding to the MODE part of the system command (variable command) and the number of reservations of the special figure type is acquired (B2003). In the case of fluctuation without reach, since the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holds increases, the address of the table corresponding to the number of holds is acquired.

When the variation pattern type is not a variation without reach (result of B2001 is “N”), that is, when the variation is a reach variation, the production control device 300 sets the number of points, the model code, the special figure type, the production mode, and the symbol type. Set the corresponding first half notice group address table (B
2004), the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the address of the first half notice allocation group table corresponding to the variable pattern type are acquired (B2005).

The production control device 300 performs a lottery for a notice appearing during the first half fluctuation (before reach) after Steps B2003 and B2005 (B2006). Subsequently, a second half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the number of points, model code, special figure type, presentation mode, and symbol type is set (B2007), and the latter half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT part of the variable command. Is acquired (B2008), and a lottery for a notice to appear during the latter half of the change (during reach) is performed (B2009). Thereafter, the contents of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the MODE part and ACT part of the fluctuation command (fluctuation command) are determined (B2010). Note that the fluctuation time and main reach contents can be found from the fluctuation commands.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the notice lottery result (B2011). Then, the stop symbol of the special display variation display game is determined according to the contents of the variation effect such as the reach effect or the notice effect (B2012). Here, the decoration stop symbol is specifically determined, for example, by determining a disjoint eye in the case of the off symbol.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting for the variable effect (B2013), and performs display setting for the notice effect (B2014). Subsequently, display setting (holding shift) for holding reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed, and for example, an animation for reducing the holding display corresponding to the decoration special figure that changes this time is set (B2015). Subsequently, a voice number that determines the effect mode by the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect operation of the decoration device are set (B2016).

Next, the production control device 300 performs display setting of the decoration special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (B
2017) In addition to the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that vary on the display device 41, display setting of the fourth symbol variation regarding the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) is performed (B2018). Note that the fourth symbol variation is caused by the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LE of the lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41.
D).

[Big hit command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, details of the jackpot command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 34) described above will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot command process executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE portion of the received jackpot command represents a fanfare (B2101). If the MODE portion of the jackpot command represents a fanfare (the result of B2101 is “Y”), that is, if the jackpot command is a fanfare command, a fanfare effect setting process for setting a fanfare effect is executed (B2102). . The fanfare command includes information on the maximum number of rounds for the current jackpot. Subsequently, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 10 (P machine state)
Is set in the game state flag indicating (B2103), and the jackpot command processing is terminated. The round number upper limit value can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol-related command (decorative symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

When the MODE portion of the received jackpot command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion of the jackpot command represents a round ( B2104). When the MODE part represents a round (B210)
4 is “Y”), that is, when the jackpot command is a round command, the effect control device 300 executes a round effect setting process and indicates the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10. The game state flag is set to round (B2105, B2106), and the jackpot command processing is terminated.

When the MODE portion of the received jackpot command does not represent a round (result of B2104 is “N”), the presentation control device 300 determines whether the MODE portion of the jackpot command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE part represents an interval (B21
When the result of 07 is “Y”), that is, when the jackpot command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process and indicates the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10. Set the gaming state flag to “interval” (B2108, B2109)
), The jackpot command processing ends.

When the MODE portion of the received jackpot command does not represent an interval (B210
7 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion of the jackpot command indicates ending (B2110). When the MODE part represents an ending (B
When the result of 2110 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes an ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect, and ending the game state flag indicating the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10. Medium is set (B2111, B2112), and the jackpot command processing is terminated.

If the MODE part of the received jackpot command does not represent an ending (B
The result of 2110 is “N”), and the effect control device 300 ends the jackpot command processing without executing any processing.

[Variation pattern]
43 and 44 are diagrams for describing an example of setting the variation pattern (variation mode) according to the present embodiment, and show a part of the contents of the variation group table and the variation pattern selection table. Note that the game control device 100 uses the variation pattern setting process (A3021, A3406, A3
506), a variation group table and a variation pattern selection table are used as the variation pattern table when determining the variation pattern (variation pattern number, variation mode).

FIG. 43 shows a part of the contents of the fluctuation group table and the fluctuation pattern selection table when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit. FIG. 43A shows a variation group table when the effect mode is the normal effect mode, that is, when the effect mode is the normal game state. As described above, the normal gaming state is a state with a low probability state (normal probability state) and not a short time state.

As a variation group (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by this variation group table, normal reach system, SP0 reach system, SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, S
There are a P3 reach system and a full rotation reach system, and a distribution value is set for each.

The variation group is selected by the selected variation group table and the variation pattern random number 1. The variation pattern random number 1 takes a value of 0 to 65535. For example, 2008 values are assigned to the normal reach system when the result is a 16R probability variation A big hit. That is, when the result is 16R probability variation A big hit, a normal reach type variation group is selected with a probability of 2008/65536.

FIG. 43B shows the contents of a normal reach variation pattern selection table used when a normal reach variation group is selected in the variation group table of FIG. The variation patterns that can be selected by this variation pattern selection table include
There are three variation patterns with variation pattern numbers of 77 to 79, all of which are normal reach, and a distribution value is set for each.

The variation pattern (variation pattern number) is selected by the selected variation pattern selection table and the variation pattern random number 2. The fluctuation pattern random number 2 takes a value of 0 to 255,
For example, 216 values are assigned to the variation pattern number 77. That is,
The variation pattern with the variation pattern number 77 is selected with a probability of 216/256.

FIG. 44 shows a part of the contents of the fluctuation group table and the fluctuation pattern selection table when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is out of place. FIG. 44 (a) shows a variation group table when the effect mode is the normal effect mode, that is, when the effect mode is the normal game state. As described above, the normal gaming state is a state with a low probability state (normal probability state) and not a short time state.

The fluctuation groups (fluctuation pattern selection table) that can be selected by this fluctuation group table include normal fluctuation (no reach) 1 system, normal fluctuation (no reach) 2 system, normal reach system, SP0 reach system, SP2 reach system, SP3 reach. There is a system.

44 (b) shows a normal variation (no reach) 1 system variation pattern selection table used when a normal variation (no reach) 1 system variation group is selected in the variation group table of FIG. 44 (a). The contents of were shown.

The variation patterns that can be selected by the variation pattern selection table include three variation patterns with variation pattern numbers 2 to 4 that are all without reach. When the total number of holdings, which is the sum of the number of holdings (starting memory number) in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, is 0 to 2, and when it is 3, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern number 2 (the fluctuation time exceeds the shortest) The variation pattern of the shortening variation is not selected. When the total number of holdings is 4 to 6 and 7 to 8, the variation pattern of variation pattern number 2 (the variation pattern of the ultra-short variation with the shortest variation time) can be selected. Further, when the total number of holdings is 7 to 8, the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation pattern number 2 (the fluctuation pattern of the super shortening fluctuation with the shortest fluctuation time) is most easily selected. For example, the case where the total number of reservations (the total number of reservations in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2) is 0 is a case where a prize is awarded when the total number of reservations is 0 (for example, waiting for customers).

[Predictor]
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment can execute a precursor effect using the board effect device 44 and the display device 41. This precursor effect is a kind of pre-reading notice effect (holding change notice) that suggests a pre-read result, and starts and ends during the fluctuation display of one special figure fluctuation display game. In the present embodiment, as the precursor effect, the movable accessory 671 of the board effect device 44 is operated, and an effect of switching the display mode of the hold display displayed on the display device 41 is executed in conjunction with the operation.

FIG. 45 shows an example of a timing chart when the precursor effect is executed. FIG. 46 and FIG. 47 show an example of the operation of the movable accessory 671 and the display on the display device 41 in the precursor effect.

In (a) of FIG. 46, a variable display area 610 for displaying a decorative special figure variable display game is provided in the center of the display screen (display unit, display area) of the display device 41. In the variable display area 610, the decorative special symbol variable display game is executed by displaying the decorative special symbols (identification information) in a variable manner on each of the left, middle, and right, and then stopping and displaying them.

In addition, a hold display unit 630 that displays a hold display 633 (standby hold display) corresponding to unstarted start memory (hold) is provided below the display unit (display region) of the display device 41. The hold display 633 displayed on the hold display unit 630 has a one-to-one correspondence with the start-up storage and is arranged in the storage order. The leftmost hold display 633 is a hold display 633 corresponding to the start memory (first start memory or second start memory) stored first, and shifts to the left (hold shift) every time it is digested. (B2015 etc.). In addition, a pre-read result (preliminary determination result) such as a result of a special figure fluctuation display game or a fluctuation pattern based on each start-up memory is displayed as a corresponding hold display 633.
It is possible to suggest by the display mode.

On the left side of the hold display section 630 (standby hold display section) is a hold digest area 640 (holding during change) for displaying information relating to the start memory during digestion (starting memory corresponding to the currently running special figure fluctuation display game). A display unit, a pending display unit during execution, a pending display region during change, and a specific display unit).
In the present embodiment, the hold display 633 at the left end of the hold display section 630 shifts (hold shift) to the hold digest area 640 at the start of the special figure variation display game. Also,
It is possible to suggest the result, fluctuation pattern, and the like of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed by the display mode of the fluctuation pending display 643 (digestion pending display) displayed in the pending digest area 640.

In addition, at the corner of the display unit of the display device 41 (for example, the upper left corner), a decorative special symbol (first identification information, variably displayed in an enlarged display (main display, normal display) in the variable display area 610 is displayed. A small symbol (second identification information, reduced symbol) that is relatively smaller than the large symbol (enlarged symbol) is variably displayed (
A variation display area 615 (small symbol variation display portion) to be reduced is provided. Further, in the corner of the display unit of the display device 41 (for example, the upper right corner), the number of unstarted start memories (the number of reserved special figure 1, the number of reserved special figure 2) is displayed as a number. A number display unit 650 (special figure 1 number hold display part) and a special figure 2 hold number display part 660 (special figure 2 number hold display part) are provided. In addition, instead of the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display part 660, the hold number display part (number hold) that displays the total hold number obtained by adding the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number A display unit) may be provided.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 46A, the board effect device 44 includes a movable accessory 671 having a shape imitating an ally character having a spear. The movable accessory 671 is, for example, the display device 4.
It is possible to move up and down between one display unit (display region) and a position that does not overlap in the front and rear direction. Further, the display device 41 is configured to be movable to the left and right without overlapping the display portion of the display device 41 and to be moved to the left and right while overlapping the display portion of the display device 41.

Here, the position that does not overlap the display portion of the display device 41 (the state where it does not overlap) is the position where the most part (for example, half or more) of the movable accessory 671 does not overlap the display portion (front and back). is there. Further, the position (overlapping state) overlapping with the display unit of the display device 41 in the front-rear direction is a position (overlapping state) where most of the movable accessory 671 (for example, half or more) overlaps with the display unit in the front-rear direction.

In the present embodiment, the hold display 633 displayed on the hold display unit 630 as a precursor effect.
The movable combination 671 is applied to a specific hold display 633 (hereinafter referred to as “specific hold display”), and the display of the specific hold display is suggested by the action of the movable combination 671 on the specific hold display. The effect of whether to change the mode (pending change) is executed.

Here, by displaying the hold display 633 displayed on the hold display unit 630 in a suggestion manner, it is possible to suggest a prefetch result such as a result of a special figure fluctuation display game or a fluctuation pattern based on the corresponding start memory. (Pending change notice). Further, by displaying the hold display 633 displayed in the hold digest area 640 in a suggestion manner, the result of the special figure change display game being executed, the change pattern, and the like can be suggested.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the specific hold display is changed to a display mode imitating an enemy character at a predetermined timing (in the case of the present embodiment, at the start of the precursor effect), and then the specific hold is performed. Although it comprises so that the movable accessory 671 may act on a display (in the case of this embodiment, a stick is stabbed), it is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the specific hold display may not be changed to a display mode imitating an enemy character.

As shown in FIG. 45, when the variation display of the special figure variation display game starts, the effect control device 300 starts a hold shift effect in which the hold display 633 shifts to the next (t11). Specifically, as shown in (a) of FIG. 46, when the special figure variation display game is finished and the next special figure fluctuation display game is started as shown in (a) of FIG. 46, the hold display 633 is displayed. Shifts to the left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45, when the special figure fluctuation display game of this time is a special figure fluctuation display game won in the lottery of the sign effect, the sign control device 300 displays the sign when the hold shift effect ends. Production starts (t12). The sign production lottery is a lottery for deciding whether or not to execute the sign production, and when the sign production lottery is won, the sign production is executed during the variation display of the winning special figure variation display game. The The lottery of the sign effect is performed, for example, in the notice lottery (B2006 or B2009) of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 41).

When the warning effect starts, first, as shown in FIG. 46C, the display mode of the specific hold display changes from the normal display mode to a display mode imitating an enemy character, and the movable accessory 6
The position 71 overlaps from the initial position (first position) that does not overlap the display unit (display area) in the front-rear direction (first position).
Move to the second position).

Next, as shown in FIG. 47D, in a state where the movable accessory 671 overlaps with the display unit in the front-rear direction (that is, in front of the display unit), the tip of the heel extends from the second position to the specific holding display. To the position where the movable accessory 671 can act on the specific hold display (third position). The movable accessory 671 may be capable of, for example, swinging down the heel,
In that case, when the scissors are swung down in a state where the movable accessory 671 has arrived at the operating position, the tip of the scissors may overlap the specific hold display.

Next, in the case where the specific hold display is the hold display 633 corresponding to the start memory won in the lottery of the hold change advance notice (the effect that suggests the prefetch result by changing the display mode of the hold display 633), FIG. As shown in (e), the display mode of the specific hold display changes from the display mode imitating the enemy character to the suggestion mode, and the precursor effect is finished. On the other hand, if the specific hold display is the hold display 633 corresponding to the start memory that was lost in the lottery of the hold change notice, the display mode of the specific hold display does not change to the suggestion mode (that is, the enemy character is changed). While the imitated display mode is maintained, or the display mode imitating the enemy character is returned to the normal display mode), the precursor effect is finished.

The lottery of the hold change notice is a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the hold change notice, and when the lottery of the hold change notice is won, the display mode of the hold display 633 corresponding to the winning start memory selected is It changes to a suggestion mode at a predetermined timing. The lottery for the pending change notice is, for example,
This is performed in the prefetch lottery process (B1713) of the prefetch fluctuation system command process (FIG. 38).

Next, as shown in FIG. 45, when the precursor effect is finished, the effect control device 300 starts the accessory return effect in which the movable accessory 671 returns to the initial position (first position) (t13). In particular,
As shown in FIG. 47 (f), the movable accessory 671 is overlapped with the display unit in the front-rear direction (third position).
(Position) to a position that does not overlap (fourth position). Next, the movable accessory 671 moves from the fourth position to the initial position (first position) in a state where it does not overlap the display unit.

Thus, the sign effect is executed during the variable display of the special figure variable display game. Therefore, if the execution time of the precursor effect is longer than the change time of the special figure variation display game, the end timing of the precursor effect is later than the variation end timing of the special figure variation display game. Thus, inconveniences such as an effect that is scheduled to be executed after the end of the change cannot be executed as scheduled. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, when the variation time of the special figure variation display game won in the lottery of the sign effect is shorter than the execution time of the sign effect, the control for canceling the execution of the sign effect or the sign Control was performed to end the production in the middle. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order not to cause inconvenience such as that the effect scheduled to be executed after the end of the fluctuation cannot be performed as scheduled without performing such control, the execution time of the sign effect is Shorten the variation time of the special figure variation display game.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, the execution time of the warning effect (t12 to t13)
), The change time (t11 to t14) of the special figure change display game that is started when the total hold number that is the sum of the hold numbers of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is the upper limit number (8 in this embodiment). Shorter than.
There are various fluctuation times of the special figure fluctuation display game, but the special fluctuation figure display game with the shortest fluctuation time among the special figure fluctuation display games that can be won in the lottery of the prelude effect, the result is out of place and the fluctuation pattern reaches It is a special figure variation display game that is executed in the normal performance mode (normal game state) without a special figure variation display game that is started when the total number of reservations is the upper limit (8 in this embodiment) ( (See FIG. 44 (b)). Therefore, in this embodiment, the execution time value of the precursor effect is
Starts when the result is out of order and the fluctuation pattern is a special figure fluctuation display game that is executed in the normal performance mode without reach, and the total number of holdings (the total number of holdings of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2) is the upper limit. Is set to be smaller than the fluctuation time value of the special figure fluctuation display game (hereinafter referred to as “pending MAX fluctuation”). As a result, regardless of the number of unstarted start memories (total number of pending) when starting the special figure variation display game, the end timing of the sign effect comes before the variation end timing of the special figure variation display game. In other words, the sign effect can be executed (executed from the beginning to the end) in any special figure variation display game.

In this embodiment, when the variation display of the special figure variation display game is started, the hold display 633 is displayed.
When the hold shift effect is started and the hold shift effect ends, the sign effect starts. In other words, in the present embodiment, execution of the sign effect is prohibited during the hold shift effect, and the sign effect starts after the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, even if the execution time of the warning effect is made shorter than the change time of the pending MAX fluctuation, depending on the length of the execution time of the warning effect and the start timing of the warning effect, the end timing of the warning effect may be displayed in the special figure fluctuation display game. In some cases, it is later than the fluctuation end timing.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the precursor effect is started after the hold shift effect, the end timing of the precursor effect is preceded by the change end timing of the special figure variation display game.
As shown in FIG. 5, the time from the start of the hold shift effect to the end of the sign effect (t11 to t13)
Is made shorter than the fluctuation time (t11 to t14) of the pending MAX fluctuation. That is, the sum of the execution time value of the hold shift effect and the execution time value of the precursor effect is set smaller than the change time value of the hold MAX fluctuation.

The sum of the execution time value of the hold shift effect and the execution time value of the precursor effect may be set to be the same as the change time value of the hold MAX change. From the standpoint of avoiding inconveniences such as being difficult to see with the object 671, it is preferable that the movable accessory 671 does not overlap the display unit of the display device 41 at the end of the variable display of the special figure variable display game. Also, from the viewpoint of avoiding inconvenience such as it becomes difficult to understand that the result mode of the decoration special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed, at the end of the variation display of the special figure variation display game, the display mode of the specific hold display The switching (change) is preferably completed.

Furthermore, when the precursor effect is finished, the accessory return effect in which the movable accessory 671 returns to the initial position (first position) is started. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, the accessory return effect ends after the timing (t15) when the next special figure variation display game starts.
It is possible to make the timing at which the accessory return effect ends to be the same as the timing at which the next special figure fluctuation display game starts or before the timing at which the next special figure fluctuation display game starts, By setting the timing at which the accessory return effect ends to be later than the timing at which the next special figure variation display game starts, it is possible to sufficiently secure the execution time of the sign effect.

The indication effect is not limited to the one using the board effect device 44 and the display device 41 and can be changed as appropriate. The frame decoration device 18, the speakers 19 a and 19 b, the display device 41, the sub display device, and the board effect device 44. Any device that uses at least one board decoration device 46 or the like may be used. For example, instead of the movable accessory 671 of the board effect device 44, a character image G1 of a teammate character with a spear may be displayed on the display device 41, and the character image G1 may be applied to the specific hold display.

FIG. 48 shows another example of display on the display device 41 in the sign effect. The aforementioned movable accessory 67
Instead of 1, the character image G1 of the display device 41 is used.

When the precursor effect starts, first, a character image G1 appears on the display unit of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (si), the character image G1 moves to a position where it can act on the specific hold display (action position). Next, when the specific hold display is the hold display 633 corresponding to the start memory won in the lottery of the hold change notice,
As shown in (su) of FIG. 48, the display mode of the specific hold display is changed to the suggestion mode, and the sign effect ends. On the other hand, when the specific hold display is the hold display 633 corresponding to the start memory that is lost in the lottery of the hold change notice, the display mode of the specific hold display does not change to the suggestion mode, and the precursor effect ends. . Then, when the sign effect is finished, a character exit effect (effect corresponding to an accessory return effect) in which the character image G1 leaves the action position is started. Thereby, the character image G1 disappears from the display unit.

Note that the timing for starting the display of the character image G1 can be changed as appropriate. For example, the character image G1 may appear before the start of the sign effect. Further, from the viewpoint of avoiding inconveniences such as it becomes difficult to understand that the result mode of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is stopped and displayed, the character image G1 is also stopped and displayed during the stop display of the special figure fluctuation display game. It is preferable. Therefore, the timing for starting the character exit effect is preferably after the stop display of the special figure variation display game is completed (for example, at the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game).

In addition, the character image displayed on the display device 41 instead of the movable accessory 671 of the board effect device 44 is not limited to the character image G1 of the teammate character having the heel and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the way of movement of the character image G1 can be changed as appropriate.

Further, the shape of the movable accessory 671 described above is not limited to a shape imitating a teammate character having a spear and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the way of moving the movable accessory 671 can be changed as appropriate.

For example, as shown to Fig.49 (a), you may provide the cover member 40f in front of the movable accessory 671 of the state which does not overlap with the display part of the display apparatus 41 before and behind. In this case, for example, FIG.
9 (a), when the movable accessory 671 is in a state where it does not overlap the display portion of the display device 41, the entire movable accessory 671 (or more than half) is covered. Being hidden by the member 40f, it becomes invisible (difficult to see). On the other hand, for example, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 49A, when the movable accessory 671 overlaps with the display unit of the display device 41 in the front-rear direction, the entire movable accessory 671 (or more than half). However, it becomes visible without being hidden by the cover member 40f.

If a plurality of precursor effects having different execution time values can be executed, all the execution time values of the plurality of precursor effects may be set smaller than the fluctuation time value of the pending MAX fluctuation, Only some of the execution time values of the plurality of precursor effects may be set smaller than the fluctuation time value of the pending MAX fluctuation.

FIG. 49B shows a case where only some of the execution time values among the plurality of precursor effects are set smaller than the fluctuation time value of the pending MAX fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 49 (b), it is possible to execute a precursor effect A with an execution time of 2 seconds, a precursor effect B with an execution time of 3 seconds, and a precursor effect C with an execution time of 8 seconds. The sign effect that the execution time value is smaller than the change time value of the special figure change display game won in the lottery is executed. That is, when the special figure fluctuation display game won in the lottery of the prelude effect is a super shortening change (variation time 4 seconds) or a shortening change (variation time 8 seconds) shown in FIG. The precursor effect selected from A and the precursor effect B may be executed during the variation display of the special figure variation display game. When the special figure fluctuation display game won in the lottery of the sign effect is the normal fluctuation (fluctuation time: 14 seconds) shown in FIG. 44B, the sign effect A, the sign effect B, and the sign effect C are selected. The selected sign effect may be executed during the variation display of the special figure variation display game.

Of course, in this case as well, the sign effect is such that the sum of the execution time value of the hold shift effect and the effect time value of the sign effect is smaller than the change time value of the special figure variable display game won in the lottery of the sign effect. It is also possible to select.

In addition, when the special figure fluctuation display game won in the sign effect lottery is the pending MAX change, the sign effect having the shortest execution time may be executed. That is, FIG. 49 (b)
In the example shown in FIG. 4, if the special figure fluctuation display game won in the lottery of the prelude effect is a super shortened change with a change time of 4 seconds (pending MAX change in this embodiment), only the prelude effect A can be selected. The warning effect B and the warning effect C may not be selected.

Further, when continuously executing the precursor effect over a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games, all the execution time values of the plurality of precursor effects continuously executed are smaller than the change time value of the pending MAX fluctuation. It may be set, or only a part of execution time values among a plurality of precursor effects continuously executed may be set smaller than the fluctuation time value of the pending MAX fluctuation.

In addition, the predictive effect that is executed for the first time among the plurality of predictive effects that are continuously executed is more likely to be executed during the pending MAX change than the predictive effect that is executed after the second time. For this reason, when only a part of the execution time values among the plurality of precursor effects that are continuously executed is set to be smaller than the fluctuation time value of the pending MAX fluctuation, the execution time of the precursor effect that is executed at least the first time It is preferable to set the value smaller than the fluctuation time value of the pending MAX fluctuation.

FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the precursor effect executed together with the pseudo-continuous variation mode (so-called pseudo continuous effect).

The effect control device 300 of the present embodiment can execute the decoration special figure variation display game in a pseudo-variable variation mode in which a unit variation display that temporarily stops after the identification information is variably displayed is performed a plurality of times to derive a result mode. . When there is a value that is smaller than the variation time value at the time of hold MAX in the variation time value of the unit variation display in the pseudo continuous variation mode, the execution time value of the indication effect is changed to the unit variation display variation in the pseudo continuous variation mode. It can be set smaller than any one of the time values (for example, the variation time value of the unit variation display with the shortest variation time). Pseudo-continuous variation mode (so-called quasi-continuous production) means that the identification information (decoration special symbol) is quasi-stopped after variably displayed between the start of variation display and the display of the stop result in one decoration special diagram variation display game. This is an effect of performing unit variation display to be displayed (temporary stop display) a plurality of times. In the quasi-continuous variation mode of the present embodiment, the quasi-continuous dedicated symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) that suggests the quasi-continuous variation mode is stopped and displayed during temporary stop display.

Temporary stop time in quasi-continuous variation mode (time between unit variation display and next unit variation display)
It is possible to execute a precursor effect with a shorter execution time. In the decorative special figure variation display game in the pseudo-continuous variation mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (t), the first unit variation display in the pseudo-continuous variation mode is completed, and as shown in FIG. In this way, among the special decoration symbols (identification information) displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas 610, the pseudo-ream dedicated symbol that appears only during the pseudo-variable variation (for example, includes the characters “ream”). Only the symbol composed of (2) remains, and it is informed that the pseudo continuous variation is in progress. Thereafter, as shown in FIG.
The unit fluctuation display for the first time starts. In this case, the sign effect is executed while the fact that the pseudo-continuous change is in progress is notified.

Specifically, for example, as shown in (h) of FIG. 50, the character image G1 (or the movable accessory 671 or the like) moves to the action position while the fact that the pseudo continuous fluctuation is being notified. . That is, the character image G1 (or the movable accessory 671 or the like) acts on the specific hold display while the fact that the pseudo continuous change is being notified. Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (tsu), when the second unit fluctuation display is started, the character image G1 (or the movable accessory 671 or the like) leaves the action position.

FIG. 51 shows an example of the case where the character image constituting the decorative special symbol acts on the specific hold display in the indication effect that the execution time is shorter than the temporary stop time in the pseudo continuous variation mode.
The character image that acts on the specific hold display may be a character image that constitutes a decorative special symbol.

For example, as shown in FIG. 51 (na), the pseudo-ream dedicated symbol is composed of a character image (for example, a character image “ream”) and a character image (for example, an image imitating a cloud). And FIG.
As shown in (d) of the above, while the fact that the quasi-continuous change is being informed, the character images constituting the quasi-continuous dedicated symbol act on the specific hold display. And when the said specific hold display is the hold display 633 corresponding to the start memory which was elected to the lottery of a hold change notice, as shown in (nu) of FIG. 51, the display mode of the specific hold display is suggested. It changes to the aspect.

Of course, not only a prelude effect (a prelude effect whose execution time is shorter than the temporary stop time) executed during the temporary stop time in the pseudo-continuous variation mode, but also a prelude effect executed during the change display of the special figure change display game ( In the sign effect etc. in which the execution time is shorter than the fluctuation time of the hold MAX fluctuation, the character image constituting the decorative special symbol may be applied to the specific hold display instead of the movable accessory 671 and the character image G1.

Further, in the present embodiment, the indication of whether or not the display mode of the hold display 633 displayed on the hold display unit 630 is changed to the suggestion mode is performed as the indication effect, but is not limited thereto. The indication effect may be, for example, an effect as to whether or not the display mode of the hold display 633 displayed in the hold digest area 640 changes to a suggestion mode.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition is executed, and the result of the variable display game is When a special result is obtained, a special game state is generated that gives a player a game value.
The gaming machine 10 extracts a predetermined random number based on the establishment of the start condition and stores it as a start memory for the variable display game, and a predetermined notice effect (a precursor) during the execution of the variable display game. Production control means (production control device 300) for executing (production). The variable display game (pending) in which the execution time value of the predetermined notice effect is started in a state where the number of start memories stored in the start storage means has reached a predetermined upper limit number (8 in this embodiment) MAX
The fluctuation time value of (variation) is smaller.

Therefore, since the execution time of the sign effect is shorter than the change time of the pending MAX change (that is, the special figure change display game with the shortest change time), the notice effect (prediction effect) is executed in any change display game. Can do.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) is configured so that a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) (in the case of the present embodiment, the hold shift The predetermined notice effect (prediction effect) is started after the effect is finished), and the sum of the execution time value of the predetermined notice effect and the value of the predetermined time (in this embodiment, the execution time value of the hold shift effect) Is a variable display game (pending MA) that is started when the number of start memories stored in the start storage means (game control means 100) has reached a predetermined upper limit number (8 in the present embodiment).
It can be configured to be smaller than the variation time value of (X variation).

By configuring in this way, since the precursor effect starts after the start of the special figure display game, it is possible to provide a period during which the player does not execute the precursor effect while expecting the player to execute the precursor effect. It becomes possible to enhance the interest of the game. The sign effect may be started at the start of the special figure variation display game.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) can control the operation of the movable accessory 671 used for the predetermined notice effect (prediction effect), and the predetermined notice effect. Later, it is possible to execute a return effect for returning the movable accessory 671 to the initial position (an accessory return effect), and the return effect is later than the variable display game (special drawing variable display game) in which a predetermined notice effect is executed. It can be configured to end during execution of the starting variable display game.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to sufficiently secure the execution time of the sign effect.
The special figure variation display game that is being executed when the accessory return effect is ended is not limited to the special figure variation display game that is executed next to the special figure variation display game in which the precursor effect is executed. Further, the accessory return effect may be ended during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the precursor effect is executed (including the end of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the precursor effect is executed).

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information based on winning of a game ball in the start winning area is executed, and the variable display game When the result of the above becomes a special result, a special game state for giving a game value to the player is generated. The start prize area includes a first start prize area (first start prize port 36) and a second start prize area (second start prize port 97, ordinary variable prize device 37). The gaming machine 10 extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball in the first start winning area and stores it as a first start memory, and also stores the predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball in the second start winning area. Start storage means (game control device 100) that extracts and stores as second start memory, and effect control means (effect control device 300) that executes a predetermined notice effect (prediction effect) during execution of the variable display game. Prepare. The execution time of the predetermined notice effect is shorter than the fluctuation time of the variable display game (pending MAX fluctuation) started in a state where the total number of holds reaches the predetermined upper limit number (8 in this embodiment).

Therefore, since the execution time of the sign effect is shorter than the change time of the pending MAX change (that is, the special figure change display game with the shortest change time), the notice effect (prediction effect) is executed in any change display game. Can do.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game and the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game are selected in consideration of the total number of reservations (total number of start memories). It is not limited to this. For example, the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is selected in consideration of the special figure 1 holding number (the number of first start memories), and the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is special figure 2 holding. It is also possible to configure the selection in consideration of the number (the number of second start-up memories). In this case, in the first special figure fluctuation display game that has the shortest fluctuation time among the first special figure fluctuation display games that can be won in the prelude effect lottery, the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is the upper limit number (for example, 4). The first special figure fluctuation display game (pending MAX fluctuation) that is started at the time, and the second special figure fluctuation display game with the shortest fluctuation time among the second special figure fluctuation display games that can be won in the lottery of the prelude effect Is a second special figure fluctuation display game (pending MAX fluctuation) which is started when the number of reserved figures in the special figure 2 is the upper limit number (for example, 4).

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the execution time of the predetermined notice effect (prediction effect) is such that the number of first start memories or the number of second start memories reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). It can be configured to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game (special-figure fluctuation display game) started in the state of being. By configuring in this way, the execution time of the sign effect is changed to the pending MAX fluctuation (
That is, since the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game having the shortest fluctuation time, it is possible to execute the notice effect (prediction effect) in any fluctuation display game.

In this embodiment, the special figure variation display game is executed in the order of winning in the start winning area. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one special figure fluctuation display game (for example, the second special figure fluctuation display) (Game) may be preferentially executed.

[Modifications of precursor effect]
The sign effect shown in FIGS. 45 to 51 is a character image (appearing on the display unit of the display device 41).
Alternatively, it is a type of precursor effect (hereinafter referred to as a “first type precursor effect”) in which a movable accessory or the like that appears in a position overlapping the display unit is always moved to the operating position. In addition to (or in place of) the first type of precursor effect, a type of precursor effect that may or may not appear when an appearing character image (or an appearing movable accessory, etc.) moves to the action position. It is also possible to perform the following (hereinafter referred to as “second type precursor effect”).

In the second type of sign effect, when the sign effect lottery is won, an action availability lottery is performed.
The action availability lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to move the character image to the action position. If the action availability lottery is won, the character is displayed during the execution of the selected special figure variation display game. The image moves to the working position. That is, when the action availability lottery is won, a character image appears and moves to the action position. On the other hand, if the selection is made in the action availability lottery, the character image appears but does not move to the action position.

Further, in the second type of sign effect, after the action availability lottery is performed, the on-change variation effect lottery is performed. The lottery of the on-change change effect during the change is the change on hold change effect (on-hold digestion area 640).
This is a lottery for determining whether or not to execute a special figure variation display game result or variation pattern that is being executed by changing the display mode of the on-change pending display 643. When the lottery of the change on hold change effect is won, the change hold display 643 displayed in the hold digest area 640 during the execution of the winning special figure change display game (specific hold display in this modification) The display mode changes to the suggested mode. In other words, when the lottery of the change on hold change effect is won, the display mode of the specific hold display changes to the suggestion mode. On the other hand, when the lottery for the change change hold change effect is lost, the display mode of the specific hold display does not change to the suggestion mode.

The lottery of the action availability lottery and the on-change pending change effect is, for example, a change effect setting process (FIG. 41).
The notice lottery (B2006 or B2009).

52A to 52C show an example of the action availability lottery table. In the action availability lottery table, the probability that the action is selected (that is, the winning probability) and the case where there is no action are selected in the case where the result of the special figure fluctuation display game executed this time is a big hit and the result is out of place. Defined probability (ie loss probability)

For example, in the case where the action availability lottery table shown in FIG. 52A is set, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed this time is a big hit, the winning is performed with a probability of 60% and the special execution to be executed this time is performed. If the result of the figure variation display game is out of place, the winning is made with a probability of 70%.

The effect control device 300 selects one action availability lottery table from among a plurality of action availability lottery tables (three types of action availability lottery tables shown in FIGS. 52A to 52C) based on the gaming state, for example. And set.

52D to 52G show an example of the on-change pending change effect lottery table. In the fluctuation pending change effect lottery table, the special drawing that wins the action availability lottery and the special figure fluctuation display game executed this time is a big hit, and the special figure that wins the action availability lottery and runs this time When the result of the variable display game is out of place, when the result is lost in the action availability lottery, and when the result of the special figure variable display game executed this time is a big hit, when the result is lost in the action availability lottery and executed this time The probability that a change with hold is selected (that is, a winning probability) and the probability that a change without hold is selected (that is, a loss probability) when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of place are defined.

For example, when the on-change pending change effect lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (d) is set, when the action availability lottery is won and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game executed this time is a big hit Wins with a probability of 70%, wins an action availability lottery, and if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game executed this time is out of place, wins with an 80% probability, loses the action availability lottery, and If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game executed this time is a big hit, the player wins with a probability of 15%, loses the action availability lottery, and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game executed this time is out of place. Will not win.

Also, regardless of which of the four types of on-change pending change effect lottery tables shown in FIGS. 52 (d) to 52 (g) is set, if the action is determined to be lost, the on-change pending change effect lottery is selected. Since the character image G2 does not act on the specific hold display, the display mode of the specific hold display changes to the suggestion mode because the winning is only when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game executed this time is a big hit. By doing so, you can suggest a big hit.

The effect control device 300 is based on, for example, the gaming state, and selects one of a plurality of on-change pending change effect lottery tables (four types of on-change pending change effect lottery tables shown in FIGS. 52D to 52G). Select and set the on-change pending change effect lottery table.

In addition, in this modification, although the display mode of the change pending display 643 displayed in the hold digestion area 640 is changed to the suggestion mode as the second type precursor effect, it is limited to this. Not. The second type precursor effect may be, for example, an effect indicating whether or not the display mode of the hold display 633 displayed on the hold display unit 630 is changed to the suggestion mode.

Moreover, in this modification, the character image G2 of the teammate character with the stick is displayed as the character image that acts on the specific hold display. However, the character image displayed on the display device 41 is not limited to this and is appropriately changed. For example, it may be a character image G1 of a teammate character having a habit. Further, the way of movement of the character image G2 can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, at a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification, at the start of the sign effect), the display mode of the specific hold display is changed to a display mode imitating an enemy character, and then the character image G2 is displayed on the specific hold display. (In the case of this modification, it is configured to strike with a stick), but is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the specific hold display may not be changed to a display mode imitating an enemy character.

FIG. 53 shows an example of the second type precursor effect in the case where the lottery of the prelude effect has been won and the action availability lottery has been won.

When the precursor effect starts, first, a character image G2 appears on the display unit of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (H), the character image G2 moves to the action position, and the stick is swung down so that the tip of the stick overlaps the specific hold display. Next, when the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is the special figure fluctuation display game won in the lottery of the fluctuation hold change effect, as shown in FIG. Changes to the suggestion mode, and the precursor effect ends. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is a special figure fluctuation display game that has been lost in the lottery of the fluctuation hold change effect, as shown in FIG. Does not change to the suggestion mode, and the sign production ends. Then, when the indication effect ends, the character image G2 leaves the action position and disappears from the display unit.

In the example shown in FIG. 53, after the character image G2 acts on the specific hold display (after the bar returns to a state where it does not overlap with the specific hold display), the display mode of the specific hold display changes to the suggestion mode. However, the timing at which the display mode of the specific hold display changes can be changed as appropriate.
For example, while the character image G2 is acting on the specific hold display (when the stick overlaps the specific hold display), the display mode of the specific hold display may change to the suggestion mode.

FIG. 54 shows an example of the second type of warning effect in the case where the lottery for the prelude effect is won and the lottery is selected for the action availability lottery.

When the precursor effect starts, first, a character image G2 appears on the display unit of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (mi), the character image G2 disappears from the display unit without moving to the action position. Next, when the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is a special figure fluctuation display game won in the lottery of the fluctuation hold change effect, as shown in FIG. Changes to the suggestion mode, and the precursor effect ends. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is a special figure fluctuation display game that has been lost in the lottery of the fluctuation pending change effect, as shown in FIG. Does not change to the suggestion mode, and the sign production ends.

The length of execution time of the sign effect when winning the action availability lottery and the length of execution time of the sign effect when winning the effect lottery may be the same or different. In this modification, the length of the execution time of the sign effect is, for example, the character image G2
It is the length from the timing of starting the display to the timing of starting the display in the suggestion mode of the specific hold display.

In addition, if the lottery is selected for the action availability lottery, after the character image G2 disappears from the display unit, the display mode of the specific hold display does not change to the suggestion mode, but before the character image G2 disappears from the display unit, the specific hold The display mode of the display may change to the suggested mode. In this case, the timing at which the character image G2 disappears from the display unit may be the same or different depending on whether or not the action availability lottery is won.

In addition, during the sign production, in order to make it stand out that the sign production is being executed, the background image is darkened (blacked out), etc. You may make it. The same applies to the first type of sign production.

In addition, as a second type of warning effect, a warning effect indicating whether or not the display mode of the on-change pending display 643 displayed in the pending digestion area 640 is changed to the suggested mode and displayed on the hold display unit 630. You may comprise so that both the indication effect of whether the display mode of the hold display 633 changes to a suggestion mode can be performed. Furthermore, in this case, the length of execution time of the precursor effect whether or not the display mode of the on-change hold display 643 displayed in the hold digest area 640 is changed, and the hold display 633 displayed on the hold display unit 630 are displayed. The length of the execution time of the precursor effect whether or not the display mode of the display changes may be the same or different. The same applies to the first type of sign production.

The timing for starting the display of the character image G2 can be changed as appropriate.
It is preferable to prohibit display start of the character image G2 during the hold shift effect in which 33 shifts to the next. That is, the timing for starting the display of the character image G2 is preferably before the hold shift effect or after the hold shift effect. The same applies to the first type of sign production.

Moreover, you may determine the frequency | count that the display mode of a specific pending | holding display changes during an indication effect based on predetermined conditions. That is, you may perform the change frequency lottery which determines the frequency | count of changing the display mode of a specific hold display. The same applies to the first type of sign production.

In addition, the character image that appears during the warning effect may be selected from a plurality of types of character images based on a predetermined condition. That is, a character lottery for selecting one character image from a plurality of types of character images may be performed. The same applies to the first type of sign production.

Moreover, you may determine the frequency | count that a character image (or movable accessory etc.) acts on a specific hold display during a precursor effect based on predetermined conditions. That is, a lottery of action times for determining the number of times that a character image (or a movable accessory or the like) is applied to the specific hold display may be performed. First
The same is true for the type precursor.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example in which a change number lottery, a character lottery, and an action number lottery are performed in combination.

As described above, the effect control device 300 performs a lottery of action availability / lottery change effect and a lottery change effect change in order to determine the effect mode of the second type precursor effect. In addition to these lotteries, the number of times that the display mode of the specific hold display changes (or selection of the number of times to change) depends on the type of character image that appears by combining the lottery for change count, the lottery for character, and the lottery for action count. Ratio), the number of times that the character image acts on the specific hold display (or the selection ratio of the number of times of acting), and the like can be varied.

In addition to the action availability lottery and the on-change pending change effect lottery, the combination of the change number lottery, character lottery and action number lottery is specified when, for example, the on-change pending change effect lottery is won. Perform lot change lottery to determine the number of times to change the display mode of the hold display,
A character lottery that selects one character image from a plurality of types of character images is performed based on the result of the lottery for the number of changes, and the character image is specifically displayed on the basis of the result of the lottery for the number of changes and the result of the character lottery. The number of times of action is determined to determine the number of times (for example, the number of hitting a specific hold display with a stick). In this case, the number-of-changes lottery, the character lottery, and the number-of-actions lottery are, for example, the notice lottery (B2006 or B2) of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 41).
009).

FIG. 55A shows an example of the character lottery table. In the character lottery table, the probability and the character image B that the character image A is selected when “holding change once” is selected by the change number lottery and “holding change twice” is selected. The probability of being selected is specified.

Here, “hold change once” means changing the display mode of the specific hold display once, that is, from the normal display mode (for example, blue circle) to the first suggestion mode (for example, green circle). It is to change to. “Twice change twice” means changing the display mode of the specific hold display twice, that is, changing from the normal display mode to the first suggestion mode, and then changing from the first suggestion mode to the second suggestion mode. It is to change into a mode (for example, red circle).

FIG. 55B shows an example of the number-of-actions lottery table. In the action frequency lottery table, “Character Image A” is selected by character lottery, and “
“Character change B” is selected, “Character image A” is selected by character lottery, “Hold change twice” is selected by change lottery, and “Character image B” is selected by character lottery. ”Is selected and“ pending change once ”is selected by the change number lottery, and“ character image B ”is selected by the character lottery,
And “one action” when “pending change twice” is selected by lot change lottery
And the probability that “double action” is selected are defined.

Here, “single action” is to make the character image act once on the specific hold display (for example, hitting the specific hold display once with a stick), and “twice action” means the character image. To act on the specific hold display twice (for example, hitting the specific hold display twice with a stick).

For example, “pending change once” is selected by the change count lottery, and “
When “twice action” is selected, the display mode of the specific hold display may be changed by the first action of causing the character image to act twice on the specific hold display. The display mode of the specific hold display may be changed by the second action.

In addition, “pending change twice” is selected by the change count lottery and “1” is selected by the action count lottery.
When “turn action” is selected, the first suggestion mode may be changed to the second suggestion mode, or the second suggestion mode may be changed without changing to the first suggestion mode. You may change to the suggestion mode.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition is executed, and the result of the variable display game is When a special result is obtained, a special game state is generated that gives a player a game value.
The gaming machine 10 extracts a predetermined random number based on the establishment of the start condition and stores it as a start memory of the variable display game, and an effect control means for executing an effect related to the variable display game. (Production control device 300). The effect control means can display a predetermined image (character image G1) and a start memory display corresponding to the start memory (the hold display 633 and the changing hold display 643) on the display device 41, and a predetermined notice effect ( As the warning effect, it is possible to execute the first pattern notice effect in which the predetermined image acts on the start memory display and the second pattern notice effect in which the predetermined image does not act on the start memory display.

In the case of this embodiment, the notice effect of the first pattern is a second type of sign effect when winning the action availability lottery, and the notice effect of the second pattern is the second effect when winning the action availability lottery.
This is a sign of type.

Accordingly, the character image G2 may or may not act on the hold display 633, and the movement of the image (character image G2) that can act on the hold display 633 is not one pattern. Can enhance the fun of the game.

In the case of the present embodiment, the character image G2 moves to the action position and the start memory display (
There are provided two patterns: a pattern that acts on the hold display 633 and the change hold display 643), and a pattern in which the character image G2 does not move to the action position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to these patterns, a pattern in which the character image G2 moves to the action position but does not act on the start memory display (does not swing the stick down) may be provided.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) is configured to display the start memory display (the hold display 633 or the changing hold display 64) in a predetermined notice effect (a precursor effect).
It is possible to change the display mode of 3). It can be configured such that the rate at which the start memory display display mode changes in the first pattern notice effect is higher than the rate at which the start memory display display mode changes in the second pattern notice effect (FIG. 52 (d). ) To (g))
.

With this configuration, whether or not the precursor effect is a precursor effect in which the display mode of the start memory display is likely to change depending on the pattern of the precursor effect (that is, by the movement of the image that can act on the start memory display). I can suggest. Therefore, at the stage where the player can recognize that the display mode of the start memory display is a symptom effect that is likely to change based on the suggestion, the player can play with a sense of expectation, so the interest of the game is improved. . In addition to the final stage of whether or not the display mode of the start memory display changes, the player is also in the middle stage of how the image (character image G2) that can act on the start memory display moves. Since it is possible to attract the interest of the person, it is possible to perform an auspicious presentation effect.

[Pending change production]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment uses the hold display unit 630 as the hold change effect.
The change display mode of the hold display 633 displayed on the display changes the hold change notice (pending change notice effect) that suggests the pre-read result, and the hold display 633 displayed in the hold digestion area 640 (the changing hold display section). It is possible to execute the on-change pending change effect that suggests the result of the special figure change display game being executed, the change pattern, and the like.

For example, when the movable accessory 671 is overlapped with the holding display units 630 and 640 in the front-rear direction (
In other words, when the holding change effect is executed in a state where the movable accessory 671 is positioned in front of the holding display portion), it is visually recognized that the display mode of the holding indications 633 and 643 is changed by the movable accessory 671. There is a risk of disability (difficult to see). However, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the movable accessory 671 overlaps with the holding display units 630 and 640 in the front-rear direction, that is, the state in which the display mode of the holding display is changed is invisible (difficult to see). ), Whether or not the execution timing of the hold change effect has arrived,
The display mode of the hold display to be changed is changed.

56 (a) shows that even if the movable accessory 671 overlaps the change target hold display 633 (here, the hold display 633 at the right end) in the front-rear direction, the effect control device 300 can display the hold change effect (
Here, the hold change notice) is executed to change the display mode of the change target hold display 633.

Of course, during the period in which the movable accessory 671 overlaps with the holding display units 630 and 640, it is possible to prohibit the execution of the holding change effect. However, when configured in this way, due to a malfunction of the movable combination 671, the movable combination 671 does not overlap the holding display portion before and after the movable combination 671 overlaps the holding display portion. When inconvenience occurs, the player cannot enjoy the accessory action effect, nor can he enjoy the hold change effect.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the execution of the hold change effect is performed regardless of whether or not the movable accessory 671 overlaps with the holding display units 630 and 640 in the front and rear directions, that is, regardless of the state of the movable accessory 671. When the timing has arrived, it is configured to start the hold change effect and change the display mode of the hold displays 633 and 643 to be changed. Thereby, the movable accessory 671
Even if it becomes impossible to enjoy the accessory action effect due to the above-mentioned malfunction, the reserved change effect can be enjoyed, so that the interest of the game can be prevented from deteriorating.

Here, if the hold displays 633 and 643 are hidden by the movable accessory 671 and become invisible (difficult to see), there is a possibility that an accurate start memory number cannot be grasped even if the display on the hold displays 630 and 640 is viewed. However, in this embodiment, since the special figure 1 hold number display part 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display part 660 are provided separately from the hold display parts 630 and 640, the hold display is invisible (difficult to see). However, the exact number of starting memories can be grasped.

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, since the hold change effect is executed regardless of the state of the movable accessory 671, the movable accessory 671 overlaps with the hold display units 630 and 640 before and after the hold change effect. The state may change to a non-overlapping state, and the movable accessory 671 is displayed on the hold display section 63.
It may change from a state that does not overlap with 0 and 640 to an overlapping state.

FIG. 56B shows the size of the movable accessory 671 (movable accessory 6 in the display unit of the display device 41).
This is an example in which the hold change effect is executed in a wider area than the size when 71 is viewed from the front.
Specifically, as an effect image that enhances the effect of the hold change effect, the movable accessory 6 is viewed from the front.
An image that protrudes from the image 71 (such as an effect image E) may be displayed.

As a result, the movable accessory 671 is overlapped with the holding display units 630 and 640 in the front and rear, and the display related to the holding change effect (the holding displays 633 and 643 to be changed and the holding display 633).
643, at least a part of an image (such as effect image E) related to the display mode change is not hidden by the movable accessory, so that the player can recognize that the hold change effect is being executed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 56, only part of the change target hold displays 633 and 643 is hidden by the movable accessory 671 and is invisible (difficult to see), but the change target hold displays 633 and 6 are not visible.
All of 43 may be hidden by the movable accessory 671 so as to be invisible (difficult to see).

In addition, a character image (a predetermined character image related to the hold change effect) is displayed as an effect image that enhances the effect of the hold change effect, and the character image is displayed as a hold display 633 regardless of the state of the movable accessory 671. An effect acting on 643 may be performed.

In addition, the operation time of the movable accessory 671 may be longer than the execution time of the hold change effect,
It may be short. Moreover, the operation time of the movable accessory 671 may be the same as the execution time of the hold change effect.

Further, instead of the movable accessory 671, a character image that can be superimposed and displayed on the hold display units 630 and 640 may be displayed. In this case, the character image may be displayed in front of the hold displays 633 and 643 or may be displayed in the back of the hold displays 633 and 643.

When the character image is displayed on the near side of the hold display 633, 643, when the character image and the hold display 633, 643 overlap, the character image is displayed as the hold display 633,
A portion of 643 that overlaps with the character image is hidden. On the other hand, when the character image is displayed behind the hold display 633, 643, when the character image and the hold display 633, 643 overlap, the hold display 633, 643 displays the hold display of the character image. The part which overlaps with 633 and 643 will be hidden.

In addition, the movable combination 671 is made of a transparent or translucent member, and through the movable combination 671, the display state of the hold display 633 and the display related to the hold change effect can be visually recognized. You may comprise. Alternatively, a hole or a gap is provided in the movable accessory 671 so that the display state of the hold indications 633 and 643 and the display related to the hold change effect can be visually recognized from the hole or the gap. Good.

FIG. 57 shows a movable accessory 672 that can be divided into a plurality of parts as a movable accessory that can overlap the holding display portions 630 and 640 in the front-rear direction. The movable accessory 672 is converted from a first state in which no gap is formed between parts (a state in which cracks are not formed) to a second state in which a gap of a predetermined width is formed between parts (a state in which cracks are completed). It may be possible.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 58, it is preferable that the execution period of the pending change effect overlaps at least a part of the period (t22 to t24) in which the movable accessory 672 is in a crack-completed state. Thereby, for example, as shown in FIG. 57, the display is suspended from the gap formed in the movable accessory 672 (that is, the gap formed during the period (t21 to t25) in which the movable accessory 672 is not broken). The state in which the display modes of 633 and 643 are changing and the display related to the hold change effect can be visually recognized.

In the example shown in FIG. 58, the start timing of the hold change effect is set to coincide with the timing (t21) at which the movable accessory 672 starts the conversion operation to the crack completion state. The start timing can be changed as appropriate, and is preferably set within a period (t21 to t25) in which the movable accessory 672 is not broken.

In the example shown in FIG. 58, the end timing of the hold change effect is set within the period (t22 to t24) in which the movable accessory 672 is in a state where the movable accessory 672 is broken, but the end timing of the hold change effect is appropriately The period during which the movable accessory 672 is not broken (t21
~ T25) is preferably set.

In addition, when the movable combination that can be overlapped with the holding display units 630 and 640 is a movable combination 672 that can be converted into an unbroken state and a crack completion state, the movable combination 672 opens and closes ( The position to perform the conversion operation to the crack completed state and the return operation to return to the unbroken state)
You may determine based on the position of the hold display 633 and 643 of change object.

In the example shown in FIG. 57, among the three hold displays 633 displayed on the hold display unit 630, the hold display 633 at the right end is easier to see when the movable accessory 672 is in the crack-completed state, and the hold display in the middle. 633 is easier to visually recognize when the movable accessory 672 is not broken.

Therefore, for example, the position where the movable accessory 672 performs the opening / closing operation is displayed as the change target hold display 633.
Is set to a position that overlaps the front and rear, so that the hold display 6 is displayed from the gap formed in the movable accessory 672.
It is possible to visually recognize how the display mode 33 is changing.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition is executed, and the result of the variable display game is When a special result is obtained, a special game state is generated that gives a player a game value.
The gaming machine 10 extracts a predetermined random number based on the establishment of the start condition and stores it as a start memory of the variable display game, and a start memory display corresponding to the start memory (hold display 633, 643) is displayed in a start memory display area (hold display section 630, hold digest area 640) provided on the display unit of the display device 41.
0), a movable accessory 671 that can be converted into a state positioned in front of the start memory display area (overlapping front and rear) and a state retracted from the front of the start memory display area (non-overlapping front and rear).
And comprising. The start memory display control means can execute a start memory display change effect (holding change effect) that changes the display mode of the start memory display regardless of the state of the movable accessory 671.

Therefore, even if the operation failure of the movable accessory occurs and it becomes impossible to enjoy the accessory action effect, the reserved change effect can be enjoyed, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced by the reserved change effect.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special map variable display game) that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition is executed, and the result of the variable display game is a special result. In such a case, a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value is generated. The gaming machine 10 includes a start storage means (game control device 100) for extracting a predetermined random number based on the establishment of the start condition and storing it as a start display for a variable display game, and a start storage display area provided in the display unit of the display device 41. Movable that can be converted into a state (front and back overlapping state) located in front of (holding display unit 630, storage and digestion region 640) and a state retracted from the front of the start storage display region (state that does not overlap front and rear) An accessory 671 and display control means (production control device 300) for controlling display contents displayed on the display unit are provided. The display control means displays the start memory display (holding display 633, 643) corresponding to the start memory in the start memory display area, changes the display mode of the start memory display in the area of a predetermined size in the display unit, and A start memory display change effect (holding change effect) that displays an image (effect image E or the like) related to the change can be executed, and the predetermined size is larger than the size when viewed from the front of the movable accessory 671. (See FIG. 56B).

Therefore, even when the movable combination 671 is located in front of the hold display portions 630 and 640, at least a part of the display related to the hold change effect is not hidden by the moveable effect, so the hold change effect causes the game. It can enhance interest.

The predetermined size may be smaller than the display unit of the display device 41, or may be the same size as the display unit of the display device 41.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special map variable display game) that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition is executed, and the result of the variable display game is a special result. In such a case, a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value is generated. The gaming machine 10 extracts a predetermined random number based on the establishment of the start condition and stores it as start memory of the variable display game, and a start memory display (holding display 633) corresponding to the start memory. Is displayed in a start memory display area (holding display section 630, hold digestion area 640) provided in the display unit of the display device 41, and is positioned in front of the start memory display area. A movable accessory 672 that can be converted into a state (a state that overlaps the front and rear), a state that is retracted from the front of the start storage display area (a state that does not overlap the front and rear), and the like.
The movable accessory 672 can be divided into a plurality of parts (parts), and a gap with a predetermined width is formed between the parts from the first state where the gaps are not formed between the parts (the state is not broken). It is possible to convert to the second state (the crack completion state). The start memory display control means can execute a start memory display change effect (holding change effect) that changes the display mode of the start memory display, and the execution period (t21 to t23) of the start memory display change effect is movable. It can be configured to overlap at least part of the period (t22 to t24) in which 672 is in the second state (see FIG. 58).

Therefore, even when the movable accessory 672 is positioned in front of the holding display portions 630 and 640, the display mode of the holding display 633 is changed from the gap (gap) formed in the movable accessory 672. Since the display related to the hold change effect can be visually recognized, the interest of the game can be enhanced by the hold change effect.

[Pre-reading effect when the hold number command is abnormal (hold number is abnormal))
59 to 60 show the results of control by the above-mentioned special figure 1 hold information setting process (FIG. 36A), special figure 2 hold information setting process (FIG. 36B), and look-ahead variation system command process (FIG. 38). FIG.

FIG. 59A is a diagram for describing a situation in which the prefetch effect is stopped when there is an abnormality in the number-of-holds command at the time of the occurrence of the hold.

FIG. 59A (a) shows a situation in which the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed in the fluctuation display area 610. There are four special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory, first start memory), special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 start memory, second start memory), and three special figure 1 hold numbers are displayed. The number 4 is displayed on the special figure 1 hold number display section 650, the number 3 is displayed on the special figure 2 hold number display section 660 that displays the special figure 2 hold number, and a total of seven hold displays 633 are displayed. For one of the hold indications 633 (indicated by diagonal lines), a hold change notice in the suggestion mode is executed.

In the situation of FIG. 59A (A), special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 start memory) occurs, production control device 30
When 0 is a normal decoration special figure 2 hold number command (A2907) received from the game control device 100 (when the result of B1701 is “N”), a pre-reading effect (notice effect) is set as shown in FIG. Executed. The pre-reading effect at the time of the on-hold occurrence is selected and set, for example, in step B1713 of the pre-reading variation command processing (FIG. 38).

In FIG. 59A (i), a total of eight hold displays 633 are displayed, and a hold display 633a corresponding to the generated special figure 2 hold is displayed at the right end. As a pre-reading effect for the generated special figure 2 hold, a hold change notice is executed, and the hold display 633a at the right end changes from the normal display mode to the suggested mode (shown in black in the figure). The pending change notice may be executed in the manner shown in FIGS. 56 and 57 described above.

Further, in FIG. 59A (i), a character image 635 “Intense fever in hold” is displayed as a pre-reading effect for the generated special figure 2 hold. Further, although it is not a pre-reading effect, a predetermined display 636 “Pending MAX” indicating that the total number of holdings has reached the upper limit number 8 (the special figure 1 holding number and the special figure 2 holding number have each reached the upper limit value 4). Is displayed as an effect.

In the situation of FIG. 59A (A), even if special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 start memory) occurs, the production control device 300 receives an abnormal decoration special figure 2 hold number command (A2907) and displays the special figure. 2 When the figure 2 hold number acquired from the hold number command exceeds the upper limit number 4 (when the result of B1701 is “Y” and the result of B1702 is “N”), the prefetch effect as shown in FIG. (Notification effect) is not executed (not set). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by executing the pre-reading effect even though the number of holds exceeds the upper limit.

In FIG. 59A (U), the hold change notice as a pre-reading effect for the generated special figure 2 hold is not executed. Note that the rightmost hold display 633a itself for the generated special figure 2 hold may not be displayed, but increases corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (here, 5) acquired from the abnormal decoration special figure 2 hold number command. The hold display may be performed as many as the number of hold (in this case, 2) that is not related to the prefetching (indicated by a dotted line). Note that the hold change notice is not executed as a pre-reading effect for the hold display for the number of holdings increased (here, 2) including the hold display for the generated special figure 2 hold.

Further, in FIG. 59A (U), the character image 635 “Intense heat in hold” as a pre-reading effect for the generated special figure 2 hold is not displayed. Further, in order to indicate that there is an abnormality in the decoration special figure 2 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number acquired from the abnormal decoration special figure 2 hold number command in the special figure 2 hold number display section 660 (here, 5) ( The value that is normally impossible exceeding the upper limit of 4) is displayed as an error in a special display mode (there is a circle). Thereby, the player can recognize that the hold number command is abnormal by looking at the error display. In addition, in order to prevent the confusion of the player when the special figure 2 hold number acquired from the abnormal decoration special figure 2 hold number command exceeds the upper limit number 4, a configuration in which the special figure 2 hold number is not displayed is also possible. is there.

Note that FIG. 59A shows the case where special figure 2 suspension occurs, but the same applies when special figure 1 suspension occurs.

FIG. 59B is a diagram for describing a situation where the pre-reading effect is not stopped when there is an abnormality in the number-of-holds command at the time of the occurrence of the hold.

FIG. 59B (E) shows a situation where the special figure variation display game is being executed in the variation display area 610, as in FIG. 59 (A). There is one special figure 1 hold, there is one special figure 2 hold, and a special figure 2 in which the number 1 is displayed on the special figure 1 hold number display section 650 for displaying the special figure 1 hold number. The number 1 is shown in the number-of-holds display section 660, and a total of two hold displays 633 are displayed.

In the situation of FIG. 59B (E), special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory) occurs, production control device 30
When 0 is a normal decoration special figure 1 hold number command (A2907) is received from the game control apparatus 100 (when the result of B1701 is “N”), a pre-reading effect (notice effect) is set as shown in FIG. 59B (O). Executed. The pre-reading effect at the time of the on-hold occurrence is selected and set, for example, in step B1713 of the pre-reading variation command processing (FIG. 38).

In FIG. 59B (O), a total of three hold displays 633 are displayed, and a hold display 633a corresponding to the generated special figure 1 hold is displayed at the right end. As a pre-reading effect for the generated special figure 1 hold, a hold-change notice (pre-reading notice effect) is executed, and the right-hand hold display 633a changes from the normal display mode to the suggestion mode (shown in black in the figure). The pending change notice is shown in FIG.
Or may be executed in the form of FIG. In addition, as a pre-reading effect for the generated special figure 1 hold, a character image 635 “In-hold intense heat” is displayed.

In the situation of FIG. 59B (E), special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory) occurs, production control device 30
Even if 0 is received as an abnormal special figure 1 hold number command (A2907), the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the special figure 1 hold number command is less than the upper limit number 4 (the result of B1701 is “Y "
When the result of B1702 is “Y”), a pre-reading effect (notice effect) is executed (set) as shown in FIG. 59B (ka). Accordingly, the pre-reading effect is executed even if there is an abnormality in the number-of-holds command, except in a special situation where the number of holds exceeds the upper limit. And the situation where the execution frequency of a prefetch effect reduces can be prevented, and it can suppress that the interest of a game falls.

In FIG. 59B (or), a character image 635 as a pre-reading effect for the generated special figure 1 suspension is generated.
“Intense fever within hold” is displayed. In addition, a hold display that is not related to prefetching may be performed for the number of holdings increased (2 here) corresponding to the number of the special figure 1 holdings (here 3) acquired from the abnormal decoration special figure 1 holding number command. (Indicated by dotted lines). Then, the holding change notice as a pre-reading effect for the holding display for the number of holdings increased (2 in this case) including the holding display for the generated special figure 1 holding is not executed. However, in another example, if the special figure 1 hold number command is abnormal and the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the decorative special figure 1 hold number command is equal to or less than the upper limit number 4, the number of hold increases (here 2). The hold display may be performed as usual (similar to the solid line hold display), and the hold change notice for the increased hold display (especially the hold display for the special figure 1 hold generated this time) may also be executed.

In FIG. 59B (or), if the decoration special figure 1 holding number command is abnormal, the decoration special figure 1
Even if the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the hold number command is the upper limit number 4 or less, the hold change notice for the increased hold display has not been executed, but it has already been started and executed before the reception of this decoration special figure 1 hold number command. The pending change notice may be continued regardless of the abnormality of the pending number command.

In FIG. 59B (or), even if the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is abnormal, if the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is equal to or less than the upper limit number 4, it is regarded as a normal command, and the special figure is displayed. 1
You may display the number of reservations (here 3). In order to show that there is an abnormality in the decoration special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 1 hold number (here, 3) acquired from the abnormal decoration special figure 1 hold number command is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display section 650. An error may be displayed in a special display mode (with a circle). In addition, if the special figure 1 hold number command is abnormal, a special figure 1 hold number may not be displayed even if the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the special figure 1 hold number command is 4 or less. It is.

Note that FIG. 59B shows a situation in which special figure 1 suspension occurs, but the same applies to the case where special figure 2 suspension occurs.

FIG. 60 is a modification to FIG. 59A. 60 (a) (ii) is similar to FIG. 59A (a) (
I). However, in FIG. 60 (U '), when the production control device 300 receives an abnormal decoration special figure 2 hold number command (A2907) and the special figure 2 hold number exceeds the upper limit number 4 (B17).
When the result of 01 is “Y” and the result of B1702 is “N”, the pre-reading effect for the generated special figure 2 hold is not executed, but the pre-reading effect that has already been started (the pre-reading effect currently being executed) ) May be terminated (B1717). For example, the hold change notice may be terminated for the hold display 633e (indicated by diagonal lines) in which the hold change notice has already been executed in FIG. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by continuing the prefetching effect being executed in spite of the abnormal state where the number of holds exceeds the upper limit. Note that the suggestion effect (the effect suggesting the result of the special-figure change display game being executed, the change pattern, etc.) by the pending change display 643 (holding display during digestion) in the hold digest area 640 may be continued or terminated. Good.

In FIG. 60 (U '), in order to prevent the player from being overly discouraged, a part of the pre-reading effects that have already been started (the pre-reading effects currently being executed) are terminated, Other parts may continue. For example, the pending change notice is ended, but the continuous notice effect or the prefetch zone effect may be continued.

59 to 60, the effect control device 300 may determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect according to the gaming state and the special figure type of the pending reservation (special figure 1 or special figure 2). . For example, in the ordinary electric power support state, winnings frequently occur at the second start winning port of the normal variable winning device 37, so that when the number-of-holding command is abnormal and the number of holdings is equal to or less than the upper limit number, the generated special figure 2 The prefetch effect for the hold may be prohibited, and only the prefetch effect for the generated special figure 1 hold may be executed (with reference to FIG. 59B). For example, in the ordinary power support state, if the number of on-hold command is abnormal and the number of on-holds exceeds the upper limit, the pre-reading effect for the on-hold that occurred at that time will not be executed, but the player's expectation for the general power support state The pre-reading effect that has already been started to be maintained (the pre-reading effect currently being executed) may be continued (with respect to FIG. 60 (U ')).

59 to 60 show the situation in which an abnormality has occurred in the hold number command (A2907) at the time of the hold occurrence. As described below, the hold number command (A33 at the hold shift time) is described.
04, A3307).

FIG. 61A is a diagram for explaining a situation in which the prefetch effect is stopped when there is an abnormality in the number-of-holds command (A3304, A3307) during the hold shift.

FIG. 61A (sa) shows a situation in which the special symbol 2 variable display game is over and a stop symbol is displayed in the variable display regions 610 and 615. FIG. There are four special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory, first start memory), special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 start memory, second start memory), and three special figure 1 hold numbers are displayed. The number 4 is displayed on the special figure 1 hold number display section 650, the number 3 is displayed on the special figure 2 hold number display section 660 that displays the special figure 2 hold number, and a total of seven hold displays 633 are displayed. For one of the hold indications 633 (indicated by diagonal lines), a hold change notice in the suggestion mode is executed. In the hold digestion area 640, the on-change display 643 is not displayed.

In the situation of FIG. 61A (sa), a hold shift (hold shift effect) in which the hold display 633 is shifted to the next is executed, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started. In this case, the game control device 100 transmits a decoration special figure 1 hold number command to the effect control device 300 (A3304).
. When the production control device 300 receives a normal decoration special figure 1 hold number command, FIG.
As described above, a pre-reading effect (notice effect) is executed. The look-ahead effect at the time of the hold shift is
Lottery is selected and set in advance in step B1713 of the prefetching variation command processing (FIG. 38), and is executed at the time of the hold shift (B2015).

In FIG. 61A, a total of six hold displays 633 are displayed, and the rightmost hold display 633a is displayed.
On the other hand, a hold change notice (prefetch notice notice) is executed as a look-ahead effect at the time of the hold shift, and changes from a normal display mode to a suggestion mode (shown in black in the figure). The pending change notice may be executed with the above-mentioned precursor effect (FIGS. 46 to 47, etc.). The sign effect can be set, for example, by a notice lottery (B2006 or B2009) in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 41).

Also, in FIG. 61A (shi), for any hold, a character image 635 “Intense heat in hold” is displayed as a pre-reading effect during the hold shift.

In the situation of FIG. 61A (sa), the production control device 300 has an abnormal decoration special figure 1 hold number command (A
3304) and the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the decoration special figure 1 hold number command exceeds the upper limit number 4, the pre-read effect (notice effect) at the hold shift is executed as shown in FIG. Not (prohibited by B2015 etc.). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by executing the pre-reading effect even though the number of holds exceeds the upper limit. In FIG. 61A (su), as in FIG. 60 (u '), the pre-reading effect already started and executed (the pre-reading effect currently being executed) may be terminated.

In FIG. 61A (su), the hold change notice as a pre-reading effect at the time of the hold shift is not executed. In addition, a hold display that is not related to prefetching may be performed for the number of holdings increased (3 here) corresponding to the number of the special figure 1 holdings (here 6) acquired from the unusual decoration special figure 1 holding number command. (Indicated by dotted lines). Note that the hold change notice is not executed as a pre-reading effect for the hold display for the increased number of holds (here, 3).

Also, in FIG. 61A (s), the character image 635 “Intense heat in hold” as a pre-reading effect at the time of the hold shift is not displayed. Further, in order to indicate that there is an abnormality in the decoration special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 1 hold number obtained from the abnormal decoration special figure 1 hold number command in the special figure 1 hold number display section 650 (here, 6) ( The value that is normally impossible exceeding the upper limit of 4) is displayed as an error in a special display mode (there is a circle). Thereby, the player can recognize that the hold number command is abnormal by looking at the error display. In addition, when the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the abnormal decoration special figure 1 hold number command exceeds the upper limit number 4, a configuration in which the special figure 1 hold number is not displayed to prevent confusion of the player is also possible. is there.

61A shows a situation in which an abnormality has occurred in the decorative special figure 1 hold number command, the same applies to the case where an abnormality has occurred in the decorative special figure 2 hold number command.

FIG. 61B is a diagram illustrating a situation in which the prefetch effect is not stopped when there is an abnormality in the number-of-holds command when a hold occurs.

FIG. 61B (se) shows a situation in which the special symbol 2 variation display game is finished and a stop symbol is displayed in the variation display areas 610 and 615 as in FIG. 61A (sa). Special figure 1 hold is 1
There is one special figure 2 hold, and the number 1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display section 650 for displaying the special figure 1 hold number, and the special figure 2 hold number display section 660 for displaying the special figure 2 hold number. The numeral 1 is shown, and a total of two hold displays 633 are displayed.

In the situation of FIG. 61B (set), a hold shift (hold shift effect) in which the hold display 633 shifts to the next is executed, and the special figure 1 variable display game starts. In this case, the game control device 100 transmits a decoration special figure 1 hold number command (A3304) to the effect control device 300. When the production control device 300 receives a normal decoration special figure 1 hold number command, FIG.
As described above, the pre-reading effect (notice effect) at the time of the hold shift is executed. The prefetch effect at the time of the hold shift is, for example, a lottery in advance in step B1713 of the prefetch fluctuation command processing (FIG. 38).
It is set and executed during the hold shift (B2015).

In FIG. 61B, a total of one hold display 633 is displayed, and the hold display 633a at the right end is displayed.
On the other hand, the hold change notice at the time of the hold shift is executed, and the normal display mode changes to the suggested mode (shown in black in the figure). The pending change notice may be executed with the above-mentioned precursor effect (FIGS. 46 to 47, etc.).

Further, in FIG. 61B (so), a pre-reading effect at the time of the hold shift is executed with respect to the hold display 633a at the right end by displaying the character image 635 “Intense heat in hold”.

In the situation of FIG. 61B (set), even if the production control device 300 receives an abnormal special figure 1 hold number command (A3304) when a hold shift (hold shift effect) is executed, the special figure 1 hold number Since the figure 1 hold number acquired from the command is the upper limit number 4 or less, a pre-reading effect (notice effect) at the time of the hold shift is executed as shown in FIG. Accordingly, the pre-reading effect is executed even if there is an abnormality in the number-of-holds command, except in a special situation where the number of holds exceeds the upper limit. And the situation where the execution frequency of a prefetch effect reduces can be prevented, and it can suppress that the interest of a game falls.

In FIG. 61B (t), the character image 635 “in-hold intense heat” is displayed as a pre-reading effect for the hold display 633a at the right end during the hold shift. Also, a hold change notice as a pre-reading effect for the hold display 633a at the right end is executed. Note that the number of holdings increased in response to the special figure 1 holding number (here 3) acquired from the abnormal special figure 1 holding number command (here 3).
Only a hold display that is not related to prefetching may be performed (indicated by a dotted line). However, in another example, even if the special figure 1 hold number command is abnormal, if the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the special figure 1 hold number command is equal to or less than the upper limit number 4, the increased hold number (here 3) May be displayed normally (similar to the solid line hold display).

In FIG. 61B, even if the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is abnormal, if the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is equal to or less than the upper limit number 4, it is regarded as a normal command, and the special figure is displayed. 1
You may display the number of reservations (here 3). In order to indicate that there is an abnormality in the decoration special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the abnormal special figure 1 hold number command 650 is specially displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display section 650. Is displayed in an error message (with a circle). In addition, even if the special figure 1 hold number command is abnormal, the special figure 1 hold number may not be displayed when the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the special figure 1 hold number command is 4 or less.

FIG. 61B shows a case where an abnormality has occurred in the decoration special figure 1 hold number command, but the same is true when an abnormality occurs in the decoration special figure 2 hold number command.

In FIG. 59 to FIG. 61 described above, the effect control device 300 is the game control device 10.
Whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect may be determined according to the setting information related to the gaming conditions acquired from the setting information command transmitted from 0. In this way, the player can enjoy guessing the setting based on the execution of the pre-reading effect, and the game is more interesting. For example, FIG.
In 9A (U) and FIG. 61A (Su), setting 3 (high setting) executes a pre-reading effect, and setting 1 (
In the low setting) and setting 2 (intermediate setting), the pre-reading effect may not be executed. Also, for example, in FIG. 59B (ka) and FIG. 61B (ta), the pre-reading effect is not executed in setting 3 (high setting) and setting 2 (intermediate setting), and the pre-reading effect is executed in setting 1 (low setting). You may do it. Similarly, in FIG. 59A (I), FIG. 59B (O), FIG. 61A (Sh), and FIG. 61B (So), a prefetch effect (for example, character image 63) is set in setting 3 (high setting) and setting 2 (intermediate setting).
5 (display of “severe heat in on-hold”) may be executed, and in setting 1 (low setting), a pre-reading effect (for example, display of character image 635 “high heat on-hold”) may not be executed.

In addition, in FIGS. 59 to 61, it is possible to change the upper limit number of the number of reservations to a predetermined number. For example, even if the hold number command is abnormal, the prefetch effect is executed if the hold number acquired from the hold number command is equal to or less than the predetermined number, and the prefetch effect is not executed if the hold number exceeds the predetermined number. Good. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent a situation where the frequency of performing the pre-reading effect decreases,
It can suppress that the interest of a game falls.

[Modification]
As a modification of the first embodiment described above, the following configuration may be employed.

When the starting memory number (holding number) indicated by the holding number command exceeds the upper limit number (here 4),
Considering that the number-of-holds command is abnormal, it is not necessary to execute a pre-reading effect (notice effect) based on a pre-reading variation command (that is, a determination result of prior determination). On the other hand, when the start memory number indicated by the hold number command is equal to or less than the upper limit number (here, 4), the hold number command may be regarded as normal, and the prefetch effect based on the prefetch variation command may be executed. For example, in FIG. 38, step B1701 may be omitted, and the prefetch effect can be set when the result of step B1702 is “Y”, and the prefetch effect is not set when the result of step B1702 is “N”. Even if it does in this way, the situation where the frequency of execution of prefetching production can be prevented, and it can control that the interest of a game falls.

Further, when the number of stored memories (holding number) indicated by the holding number command is less than the lower limit number (here, 1), the holding number command is regarded as abnormal, and the prefetching variation command (that is, the determination result of the prior determination) It is not necessary to execute a prefetch effect (notice effect) based on. On the other hand, when the starting memory number indicated by the hold number command is equal to or greater than the lower limit number (1 in this case), the hold number command may be normal and the prefetch effect based on the prefetch variable command may be executed. For example, in FIG. 38, step B1701 is omitted, and in step B1702, it is determined whether or not the starting storage number (holding number) indicated by the holding number command is equal to or greater than the lower limit number. And step B170
When the result of 2 is “Y”, the prefetch effect can be set, and the result of step B1702 is “N”.
In this case, the pre-reading effect may not be set. Even if it does in this way, the situation where the frequency of execution of prefetching production can be prevented, and it can control that the interest of a game falls.

Further, when the start memory number (hold number) indicated by the hold number command is less than the lower limit number (here 1) or exceeds the upper limit number (here 4), the hold number command is regarded as abnormal, It is not necessary to execute a prefetch effect (notice effect) based on the prefetch variation command. On the other hand, when the starting memory number indicated by the hold number command is not less than the lower limit number and not more than the upper limit number (when it is in a range (1 to 4) defined by the upper limit value and the lower limit value), the hold number command is normal. In view of this, the prefetch effect based on the prefetch variation command may be executable. For example, in FIG. 38, step B1701 is omitted, and in step B1702, the start storage number (
It is determined whether or not (holding number) is not less than the lower limit number and not more than the upper limit number. And step B17
When the result of 02 is “Y”, the prefetch effect can be set, and the result of step B1702 is “
In the case of “N”, the pre-reading effect may not be set. Even if it does in this way, the situation where the frequency of execution of prefetching production can be prevented, and it can control that the interest of a game falls.

[Operations and effects of the first embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of a start condition (such as winning in a start winning area), Production control means (production control device 3) capable of producing production related to the variable display game
00) and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the result mode of the variable display game is a special result mode. The start storage means (for example, the game control device 100) can store the start storage as the right to execute the variable display game up to a predetermined upper limit number based on the establishment of the start condition. The pre-determining means (for example, the special figure holding information determining process of the game control device 100) is based on the execution information of the variable display game based on the start memory stored by the start storage means and the variable display game based on the start memory is executed. Also determine before. The game control means has start memory number information (hold number command) indicating the start memory number (hold number) stored by the start memory means.
Can be transmitted to the effect control means.

The effect control means (effect control device 300) is a notice effect based on the determination result of the prior determination means (
Prefetching effect) can be executed. When the received start memory number information (holding number command) is abnormal, the effect control means (effect control device 300) provides a notice effect (if the start memory number indicated by the start memory number information exceeds the upper limit number). On the other hand, if the start memory number indicated by the start memory number information is not more than the upper limit number, the notice effect (prefetch effect) can be executed. For example, when the starting memory number indicated by the starting memory number information (holding number command) increases or decreases by 2 or more at a time,
When the start memory number information (holding number command) is not received but only the determination result of the prior determination means is received by the effect control means (effect control device 300), the received start memory number information (hold number command) is abnormal. It can be determined that there is. Missing start memory number information (holding number command) can cause such an abnormality.

In this way, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) is in advance if the start memory number indicated by the start memory number information is equal to or less than the upper limit number even when the received start memory number information (holding number command) is abnormal. A notice effect (prefetch effect) based on the determination result of the determination means can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the frequency of execution of the pre-reading effect decreases due to an abnormality in the number-of-holds command, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. It should be noted that if the start storage effect is not executed based on the determination result of the prior determination means when there is an abnormality in the start memory number information (holding number command), the frequency of execution of the prefetch effect decreases.

On the other hand, if the start memory number indicated by the start memory number information exceeds the upper limit when the received start memory number information (holding number command) is abnormal, the effect control means (effect control device 300)
The notice effect (prefetch effect) based on the determination result of the prior determination means is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by executing the pre-reading effect even though the starting memory number exceeds the upper limit number.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is
When there is no abnormality in the received start memory number information, or when the start memory number indicated by the start memory number information is equal to or less than the upper limit number even if the received start memory number information is abnormal, ) Can be executed. The production control means receives the starting memory number information (holding number command)
If the start memory number indicated by the start memory number information exceeds the upper limit number, the notice effect (pre-read effect) that has already been executed is canceled before the start memory number information is received. Good. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by continuing the pre-reading effect being executed in spite of the abnormal state in which the starting memory number exceeds the upper limit number.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes setting change means (setting change device 43) that can change settings relating to gaming conditions, and can execute a notice effect (prefetch effect) according to the setting by the setting change means. It is. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing the setting based on the execution of the notice effect (prefetch effect), and the interest in the game is improved.

[Second Embodiment]
The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 66A. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first embodiment.

[Timing chart for decorative special design and decorative reduced design]
FIG. 62 shows a hold display 633 (special drawing hold display), a decorative special symbol (identification information, a decorative first symbol, a large symbol), and a decorative reduced symbol (identification information, a decorative second symbol, small in the second embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the change of the display mode by the time progress of (design).

As shown in the screen transition diagrams to be described later with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66A, the decoration special symbol is displayed in a plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, The middle area 610C) is displayed in a plurality of columns. Specifically, in each variable display area 610, the left area 610A has a decorative first symbol A (left large symbol, first special symbol).
However, in the right region 610B, the decorative first symbol B (right large symbol, second special symbol) is present in the middle region 610C.
The first design C (medium-sized design, third special design) is displayed in an enlarged display (main display, normal display)
And displayed in a variable manner.

The decorative reduced symbol is a special symbol smaller than the decorative special symbol, and, as shown in a screen transition diagram to be described later with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66A, in the variable display area 615 provided on the right side of the display screen of the display device 41. Then, it is displayed in a variable manner (reduced display) so that three are arranged vertically. Specifically, in the variable display area 615, the decorative reduced symbol arranged above is the decorative second symbol A (upper small symbol), and the decorative reduced symbol arranged below is the decorative second symbol B (lower small symbol). The decorative reduction symbol arranged in the inside is the decorative second symbol C (small and medium symbol).

The variation display mode of the decoration special symbol and the decoration reduced symbol is set, for example, in step B2017 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 41) executed by the effect control device 300.

Returning to FIG. 62, the description of the hold display 633, the decorative special symbol, and the decorative reduced symbol timing chart will be continued. 62. From the time t0 to the time t3 in FIG. 62, in the normal gaming state (normal state) in which no special gaming state (specific gaming state or special gaming state) has occurred, the total number of the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold number Is the timing from the start of change to the stop of change when the number of holds (the number of start memories, the number of special figure holds) has not reached the upper limit (for example, 8). Note that, in the short-time state or the probable change state, the time t0 to the time t3 may be set to be the timing from the start of change to the stop of change when there is no pending number.

At time t0, the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative second symbols A to C start to vary. At time t0, the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed in a normal variation mode (normal variation, normal variation pattern) in which the decorative special symbols are scrolled up and down one after another. The decorative second symbols A to C are variably displayed in a changing manner in which the displayed decorative reduced symbols are changed in order so that they are switched in order without scrolling to the next decorative reduced symbol.

At time t1, it is temporarily stopped (fluctuation stopped) as a substantially stopped state in which the decorative first pattern A is not fixed,
At time t2, the decorative pattern 1 is temporarily stopped as a substantially stopped state in which the design B is not fixed.

When the decorative first symbol A is temporarily stopped at time t1, for example, the decorative first symbol A becomes a fluctuation fluctuation in which the temporarily stopped symbol is swayed with a small swing width. In addition, the decorative first symbol scrolled forward and backward (up and down) of the temporarily stopped ornament 1 pattern A and displayed in the same row as the ornament 1 symbol A
The symbol immediately before or after symbol A (± 1 symbol) is not displayed. The symbol (± 1 symbol) immediately before or after the decorative first symbol A is displayed in the same row as the decorative first symbol A in one direction (for example, the vertical direction) in the display screen (FIG. 63). To FIG. 66A). One direction in the display screen corresponds to the variable display direction with respect to the decorative pattern A.

When the decorative first symbol B is temporarily stopped at time t2, the decorative first symbol B similarly fluctuates. In addition, it is scrolled back and forth before the temporarily stopped ornament 1st symbol B, and the ornament 1st symbol B
The symbol (± 1 symbol) immediately before or after the decorative first symbol B displayed in the same row is hidden. The symbol (± 1 symbol) immediately before or after the decorative first symbol B is displayed in the same row as the decorative first symbol B in one direction (for example, the vertical direction) in the display screen (FIG. 63). To FIG. 66A). One direction in the display screen corresponds to the variable display direction with respect to the decorative first pattern B. In addition,
The decorative first symbol C which has not been temporarily stopped continues to be displayed together with the decorative second symbols A to C (decorated decorative symbols).

At time t3, the decoration is stopped (variation stopped) as a stopped state in which the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative second symbols A to C are fixed. At time t3, the decorative first symbol A and the decorative first symbol B are
The temporarily stopped symbol becomes the symbol that is stopped as it is. In addition, when the decorative first symbol C and the decorative second symbols A to C are finally stopped, a predetermined symbol is displayed as a fixed symbol fixed in the special figure variation display game. At that time, the symbols scrolled and displayed before and after the decorative first symbol C are hidden. A symbol (± 1 symbol) immediately before or after the decorative first symbol C is displayed in the same row as the decorative first symbol C in one direction (for example, the vertical direction) in the display screen (FIG. 63). To FIG. 66A). One direction in the display screen corresponds to the variable display direction with respect to the decorative first pattern C.

Next, from time t4 to time t5, the upper limit number (for example, 8) in the normal gaming state
Is the timing from the start of change to the stop of change when Note that, in the short-time state or the probability variation state, the time t4 to the time t5 may be set to be the timing from the start of change to the stop of change when the number of holdings is one or more.

At time t4, the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative second symbols A to C each start to change with a shortened variation that varies in a shorter time than the normal variation. At time t4, the decorative first symbols A to C
Is displayed in a state in which the symbols (± 1 symbols) before and after one of the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed. The decorative second symbols A to C are variably displayed in a changing manner that changes so that the decorative reduced symbol is sequentially switched to the next decorative reduced symbol on the spot.

At time t5, the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative second symbols A to C are stopped. In the shortening variation, not only the decorative first symbol C and the decorative second symbols A to C, but also the decorative first symbols A and B have the time t
In FIG. 5, the display is variably displayed without temporarily stopping until the actual stop. Thereafter, at time t5, when the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative second symbols A to C are finally stopped, a predetermined symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol determined as a result mode of the special figure variation display game. At that time, decoration first
The ± 1 symbols that are scrolled before and after the symbols A to C are hidden.

From time t6 to time t9, normal reach fluctuation (N reach fluctuation) in the normal gaming state
This is the timing from the start of change to the stop of change in the reach state. In addition,
Even in the short-time state or the probability variation state, the time t6 to the time t9 can be set to have the same timing as in the reach state in which the N reach variation in the normal gaming state occurs.

At time t6, the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative second symbols A to C each start to change with a change pattern of N reach change. At time t6, when the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed, ± 1 symbols before and after the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed, and the decorative second symbols A to C are reduced in size. The symbols are variably displayed in a changing manner that changes in order on the spot without scrolling.

At time t7, the ± 1 symbol scrolling before and after the decorative first symbol A in one direction (for example, up and down direction) in the display screen is hidden, and thereafter the decorative first symbol A is temporarily stopped.

At time t8, the ± 1 symbol scrolling before and after the decorative first symbol B in one direction (for example, up and down direction) in the display screen is hidden, and then the decorative first symbol B becomes the decorative first symbol A. It becomes the same decoration special design and is temporarily stopped, and it reaches a reach state.

At time t9, the symbols scrolling before and after the decorative first symbol C in one direction (for example, up and down direction) in the display screen are hidden, and then the decorative first symbol C and the decorative second symbol A are displayed.
~ C is stopped. Also, the decorative first symbols A and B that have been temporarily stopped are also stopped.

[Screen transition example when the number of holds has not reached the upper limit]
FIG. 63 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the second embodiment, and the total number of reservations that is the sum of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number in the normal gaming state. (
It is an example of the screen transition of the whole game when the number of start memories and the number of special figure holds does not reach the upper limit number (for example, 8). In addition, when each of the special figure 1 holding number and the special figure 2 holding number reaches the respective upper limit number (for example, four), the total holding number also reaches the upper limit number (for example, eight).

  63 (sa) is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display game.

A plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, and middle area 610C) are provided in the center of the display screen of the display device 41, and the first decorative pattern A is displayed in the right area 610B in the left area 610A. Is a decorative first symbol B, and in the middle region 610C, the decorative first symbol C is enlarged and displayed in a normal variation manner. Similarly, in the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen of the display device 41, three decorative reduced symbols (decorative second symbols A to C, special symbols smaller than the decorative special symbols) are variablely displayed (reduced display). The The decorative special symbol (decoration first symbol A to C) of the variable display area 610 at the center of the display screen is also the variable display area 61 at the right end of the display screen.
The decorative reduction symbols (decoration second symbols A to C) displayed in FIG. 5 are also variable displays performed by the same special symbol variable display game. Normally, the stop symbols are the same, but different stop symbols may be used. Good.

In the following drawings, when the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed in a normal variation manner, the variably displayed decorative first symbols A to C are indicated by “↓”.

A special figure 1 hold number display section 650 and a special figure 2 hold number display section 660 are displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen. In the special figure 1 hold number display portion 650, a number “1” indicating the number of the special figure 1 hold, which is the number of the first start memory (the special figure 1 hold), is displayed, and in the special figure 2 hold number display portion 660, The number “1” indicating the number of the special figure 2 hold, which is the number of the second start memory (the special figure 2 hold), is displayed. In addition,
The first start memory and the second start memory are alternately stored up to 4 each (up to 8 in total) and are digested in order from the old start memory. In FIG. 63 (sa), the special figure 1 variable display game is executed based on the first start memory which was the oldest start memory.

In the hold display section 630 displayed at the lower center of the display screen, a hold display 633 (special drawing hold display) indicating the unstarted first start memory or second start memory is displayed. On hold display section 630, hold display 633 indicating the first start memory and hold display 633 indicating the second start memory are alternately displayed, and up to eight hold displays 633 can be displayed. In FIG. 63 (sa), two hold displays 633 are displayed on the hold display section 630.

Further, a reserved digest area 640 (specific display section, changing pending display area) is displayed next to the hold display section 630 at the lower center of the display screen. A pedestal is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. On the pedestal in the reserved digest area 640, a special figure changing hold display (special figure digesting hold display) corresponding to the special figure changing display game being executed (during digestion) is displayed.

63 is a display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the temporary stop as a substantially stopped state in which the decorative first symbol A variably displayed in the left region 610A of the variably display region 610 is not fixed. In the right region 610B and the middle region 610C of the variation display region 610, the variation display of the decorative special symbol is continued in a normal variation mode. In the left area 610A, “2” of the decorative first pattern A is variably displayed. Below the left region 610A, a left front region 611A in which the symbol (-1 symbol) immediately before the decorative first symbol A is variably displayed is provided as a part of the front variation display region 611.

The front variation display area 611 is provided below the variation display area 610, and the left front area 611A in which the symbol (-1 symbol) immediately before the decoration first symbol A is displayed and one of the ornament first symbol B is displayed. The right front area 611B where the previous symbol (-1 symbol) is displayed, and the symbol (-1 before the ornament 1 symbol C)
A middle front area 611C in which a symbol is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 63 (), immediately before the decorative first symbol A of the left region 610A temporarily stops, the left front region 611A positioned below the left region 610A has a left side of the decorative first symbol A.
“1” is variably displayed as one symbol. In the right region 610B and the middle region 610C, the decorative first symbols B and C continue to be displayed in a normal variation manner (“↓”) without temporarily stopping, and even in the right front region 611B and the middle front region 611C. The symbols in front of the decorative first symbols B and C are variably displayed (not shown).

63 () is a display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the decorative first symbol B temporarily stops in the right region 610B after the decorative first symbol A temporarily stops in the left region 610A of the variable display region 610. is there. In the left region 610A, “2” of the decorative first pattern A is in a temporarily stopped state. In addition, the -1 symbol ("1") of the decorative first symbol A displayed in the left front area 611A is not displayed immediately before the decorative first symbol A is temporarily stopped. Thereby, the hold display and the effect image are easy to see without being disturbed by the -1 symbol, and become conspicuous. That is, the -1 symbol (“1”) of the decorative first symbol A is
“2” of the decorative pattern 1 A is hidden (erased) a predetermined time before the temporary stop timing. For example, for a predetermined time, “2” of the decorative pattern 1 A is the position at the top of the display screen ((
This is a time shorter than the time required to move from the position (b) to the temporary stop position (position (b) in FIG. 63). Similarly, the symbol immediately after the decorative special symbol A (+1 symbol) is not displayed immediately before the decorative first symbol A is temporarily stopped (not displayed from the beginning or erased if displayed). To do)
.

It should be noted that the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol A is not limited to the non-displaying mode, but is changed to a mode of displaying in a state that is less visible than the decorative first symbol A by changing the transparency (for example, the transparency is increased). You can also. In addition, the first ornament displayed in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize immediately before the temporary stop of the first decorative pattern A
The symbol -1 of the symbol A may be hidden simultaneously with the temporary stop of the first symbol A of the decoration.

The decorative special symbols (decoration first symbols A to C) of the fluctuation display area 610 in the temporary stop state are, for example,
This is a stop mode in which the fluctuation changes so as to gently shake with a predetermined pattern. In addition,
The decorative special symbol in the temporary stop state is not limited to the stop mode in which the fluctuation is performed, but may be other stop modes as long as it is other than the stop mode in which the actual stop is performed as the fixed stop state. For example, the stop mode in which one or two decorative special symbols (for example, decorative first symbols A and B) stop before all the special decorative symbols (decorative first symbols A to C) stop is temporarily stopped. It is good.

In the right area 610B of the variable display area 610, “5” is displayed as a special decoration pattern immediately before the decorative first pattern B temporarily stops, and in the right front area 611B below the right area 610B, the decorative first graphic B is displayed. "4" is displayed as a symbol of -1. In the middle region 610C, the decorative first graphic C does not stop and continues to display the variation (“↓”) in a normal variation manner. Further, in the middle area 610C of the fluctuation display area 610, the fluctuation display of the decorative first symbol C is continued in a normal fluctuation mode.

63 (se) is a display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the decorative first symbol B is temporarily stopped in the middle region 610C after the decorative first symbol B is temporarily stopped in the right region 610B of the variable display region 610. is there. In the left area 610A, “2” of the decorative first pattern A is in a temporarily stopped state, and the right area 6
In 10B, “5” of the decorative first design B is in a temporarily stopped state. Also, the front right area 611
The -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B displayed on B is hidden immediately before the decorative first symbol B temporarily stops. Thereby, the hold display and the effect image are easy to see without being disturbed by the -1 symbol, and become conspicuous.

That is, the -1 symbol (“4”) of the decorative first symbol B is hidden (erased) a predetermined time before the timing at which “5” of the decorative first symbol B temporarily stops. For example, the predetermined time is the first decoration
“5” in symbol B changes from the position at the top of the display screen (the position indicated by (（) in FIG. 63) to the temporary stop position (FIG.
This is a time shorter than the time required to move to the (se) position. Further, the predetermined time related to the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B may be different from that related to the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol A. A configuration in which the symbol (“4”) is hidden (erased) at the timing when the symbol (“4”) overlaps with the hold display 633 and the change hold display 643 or when it touches the lower end of the display screen is also possible.

Similarly, the symbol immediately after the decorative special symbol B (+1 symbol) is not displayed immediately before the decorative first symbol B is temporarily stopped.

Note that the symbol -1 of the ornament 1 symbol B is displayed in a state that it is more difficult to see than the ornament 1 symbol B just before the ornament 1 symbol B is temporarily stopped, like the symbol 1 of the ornament 1 symbol A. Decorative pattern 1
The temporary stop may be hidden at the same time.

In the middle area 610C, “4” is displayed as a decoration special symbol immediately before the decoration first symbol C is actually stopped. In the middle front region 611C below the middle region 610C, the symbol -1 symbol of the decoration first symbol C is displayed. “3” is displayed.

FIG. 63 (so) shows the decorative first symbols A to C and the variable display area 615 of the variable display area 610.
This is a display screen of the display device 41 when the decoration reduction symbol is stopped as a final stop state. The -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol C displayed in the middle front region 611C is the variable display region 6
All of the ten decorative first symbols AC and the decorative reduced symbols in the variable display area 615 are hidden immediately before the main stop. Thereby, the hold display and the effect image are easy to see without being disturbed by the -1 symbol, and become conspicuous.

In other words, the -1 symbol (“3”) of the decorative first symbol C is hidden (erased) a predetermined time before the timing at which “4” of the decorative first symbol C is fully stopped. For example, the predetermined time is the first decoration
The symbol “4” in the symbol C changes from the position at the top of the display screen (the position shown in FIG. 63) to the actual stop position (FIG. 63).
It is a time shorter than the time for moving to (the position). Moreover, the predetermined time in the case of this stop may differ from the case of temporary stop. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the -1 symbol is hidden (erased) at the timing when the symbol -1 is overlapped with the hold display 633 and the changing hold display 643, or at the timing when it touches the lower end of the display screen.

Similarly, the symbol (+1 symbol) immediately after the decorative special symbol C is hidden immediately before the decorative first symbol C is stopped (not displayed from the beginning or erased when displayed). To do).

It should be noted that the symbol -1 of the decorative first symbol C is displayed in a state that is less visible than the decorative first symbol C immediately before the main stopping of the decorative first symbol C, and is not displayed simultaneously with the main stopping of the decorative first symbol C. It may be displayed. In addition, the on-change pending display 643 corresponding to the currently running special-figure display game displayed in the on-hold digestion area 640 is digested with the main stop of the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative reduced symbol and is not displayed. Become.

FIG. 63 () is a display screen of the display device 41 when the next special figure variation display game is started after the main stop of the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative reduced symbols. When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started as the next special figure fluctuation display game based on the oldest start memory among the remaining start memories, the display positions of the respective hold indications 633 in the hold display section 630 are adjacent to each other. Special figure 2 displayed on special figure 2 number-of-holds display 660 while being moved (hold shift) to the display position
The number indicating the number of holds is switched from “1” to “0”. Note that the number indicating the special figure 1 hold number displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display section 650 remains “1”.

The hold display 633 located at the end of the hold display unit 630 is erased from the hold display unit 630,
The in-flight hold display 643 corresponding to the erased hold display 633 is displayed in a predetermined manner (as arranged on the pedestal) in the hold digest area 640 (to the hold digest area 640 of the hold display 633). Hold shift). As a result of the hold shift of the hold display 633 to the hold digestion area 640, the hold display 633 located at the end of the hold display unit 630 is
It seems that it has moved from the holding display section 630 to the holding digestion area 640. In the hold display section 630, only one hold display 633 corresponding to the special figure 1 hold is displayed.

When the next special-figure display game is started, a special symbol (-1 symbol) immediately before the decorative special symbol in the variable display area 610 (decoration first symbol A to C) is displayed. Design (+1
The symbol is displayed (± 1 symbol display), and the fluctuation starts. The decorative special symbol and its ± 1 symbol are displayed in a line in one direction (for example, the vertical direction) in the display screen.

The decorative special symbol +1 symbol is a post-change display area 6 provided above the change display area 610.
12 is displayed. In the rear variation display area 612, a left rear area 612A in which a symbol (+1 symbol) immediately after the decorative first symbol A is displayed, and a symbol (+1 symbol) immediately after the decorative first symbol B are displayed. The right rear region 612B and the middle rear region 612C in which the symbol (+1 symbol) immediately after the decorative first symbol C is displayed.

As shown in (t) of FIG. 63, the decorative special symbol -1 symbol is displayed in the previous variation display region 611 provided below the variation display region 610, and the +1 symbol is displayed above the variation display region 610. It is displayed in the fluctuation display area 612 after being provided.

Specifically, the left front area 611A has “1” as the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol A (“2”).
A part of “3” is displayed as the +1 symbol in the left rear area 612A. In the right front area 611B, a part of “4” is displayed as the −1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B (“5”), and a part of “6” is displayed as the +1 symbol in the right rear area 612B. The Middle front area 61
In 1C, a part of “3” is displayed as a −1 symbol of the decorative first symbol C (“4”), and a part of “5” is displayed in the middle rear region 612C as a +1 symbol.

In practice, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), a part of the front variation display area 611 and the rear variation display area 612 are partially displayed on the display device 41 according to the position of the decorative special symbol that has been varied. However, it is also possible to display all ± 1 symbols by changing the enlargement ratio (size) of the magnified display of the decorative special symbols.

[Screen transition example when the number of holds reaches the upper limit]
FIG. 64 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the second embodiment. In the normal gaming state, the total number of holds (the number of start memories, the number of special figure holds) is the upper limit number ( This is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when the number reaches 8). In the following description of FIGS. 64 to 66A, the description overlapping with FIG. 63 will be omitted as appropriate.

(C) of FIG. 64 is a display screen of the display device 41 during special figure variation display. (C) of FIG.
Then, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed in a state where the total number of suspensions is accumulated up to the upper limit.
Therefore, a number “4” indicating the number of special figure 1 reservations is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation number display portion 650 at the upper left corner of the display screen, and a special figure 2 reservation number display part 660 indicates the special figure 2 reservation number. The number “4” is displayed, and the upper limit is 8 in total. In addition, eight hold displays 633 are displayed in the hold display section 630 at the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 64 () shows the first decorative symbols A to C and the variable display area 615 of the variable display area 610.
Is a display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the actual stop. When the total number of holdings has reached the upper limit, in order to shorten the variation time, a shortening variation or a super shortening variation is executed, and all of the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative reduced symbols are simultaneously stopped. . Therefore, when the total number of reservations reaches the upper limit, the decorative first symbols A and B do not temporarily stop.

Immediately before the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative reduced symbol are stopped, “2” is variably displayed in the left area 610A as the decorative first symbol A, as shown in FIG. 6
In 11A, “1” is variably displayed as the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol A. Right area 610
“5” is variably displayed as a decorative first symbol B in B, and “4” is variably displayed as a -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B in the front right region 611B. In the middle area 610C, “4” is variably displayed as the first decorative pattern C, and in the middle front area 611C, “3” is displayed as the -1 pattern of the first decorative pattern C.
"Is displayed in a variable manner.

FIG. 64 () shows the decorative first symbols A to C and the variable display area 615 of the variable display area 610.
Is a display screen of the display device 41 when the book is stopped. Previous variation display area 6
11 (the front left area 611A, the right front area 611B, the middle front area 611C), each symbol (one symbol) in front of the decorative special symbol (decoration first symbol A to C) is a variable display region. 61
All of the decorative first symbols A to C of 0 and the decorative reduced symbols in the variable display area 615 are hidden immediately before the main stop. As a result, the hold display and the effect image are easy to see without being disturbed by each -1 symbol, and become conspicuous.

That is, each -1 symbol of the decorative special symbols (decorative first symbols A to C) is hidden (erased) a predetermined time before the timing at which the decorative special symbols are stopped. For example, for a predetermined period of time, a special decoration pattern (decoration first pattern A to C) moves from the position at the upper part of the display screen (the position shown in FIG. 64) to the main stop position (the position shown in FIG. 64). It is shorter than the time to do.

In addition, the structure which each -1 symbol becomes non-displayed (it erase | eliminates) at the timing which overlaps with the hold display 633 and the change hold display 643 is also possible. Further, a configuration in which each -1 symbol is hidden (erased) at the timing when it touches the lower end of the display screen is also possible.

Similarly, each symbol (+1 symbol) immediately after the ornament special symbol (decoration 1 symbol AC)
Is not displayed immediately before the decoration first design is completely stopped (not displayed from the beginning or erased when displayed).

FIG. 64 (and) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the next special-figure display game is started after the main stop of the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative reduced symbol. When the special figure 2 variable display game is started as the next special figure variable display game, each hold display 633 in the hold display unit 630 is displayed.
Is shifted to hold, and the number indicating the number of special figure 2 hold displayed in the special figure 2 hold number display section 660 is switched from “4” to “3”. Note that the number indicating the special figure 1 hold number displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display section 650 remains “4”.

In addition, the hold shift of the hold display 633 to the hold digest area 640 is executed, and the hold display 633 located at the end of the hold display section 630 is changed from the hold display section 630 to the hold digest area 640.
And the on-change display 643 is displayed. The number of hold displays 633 in the hold display section 630 is changed from eight to seven.

When the next special symbol variation display game is started, the symbols before and after the ornament special symbol (decoration first symbol A to C) in the variation display area 610, as in the case where the total number of holds has not reached the upper limit. (± 1
The symbol is displayed and the fluctuation starts.

Then, as shown in (N) of FIG. 64, the following special figure variation display game is executed. Fig. 64
(Na) is a display screen of the display device 41 during the execution of the next special figure variation display game.

It should be noted that the normal fluctuation shown in FIGS. 62 and 63 may be executed without executing the shortening fluctuation (super-shortening fluctuation) in a predetermined case even if the total number of holdings reaches the upper limit number. For example, the first special figure change display game (first rotation of the electric support state) when the time reduction state (the normal power support state, the electric support state) is reached, or the last special figure immediately before the time reduction state ends. In the fluctuation display game (the last rotation in the electric support state), the normal fluctuation can be executed even when the total number of holdings reaches the upper limit number.

In addition, the first special figure variation display game when the variation pattern or variation effect in the short-time state changes greatly (for example, when the mode or stage changes at the 50th electronic support), the variation pattern or variation effect in the normal gaming state In the first special figure fluctuation display game when the game changes greatly (for example, the first rotation when the mode or the stage changes), the normal fluctuation can be executed even when the total number of holdings reaches the upper limit number. it can.

[Screen transition example when the reach state occurs in the normal state]
FIG. 65A is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the second embodiment, and is an example of screen transition of the entire game when the reach state occurs in the normal game state.

(Ni) of FIG. 65A is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display. In (
2), the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in a state in which the total number of suspensions is three.
Accordingly, the number “2” indicating the number of special figure 1 reservations is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation number display section 650 at the upper left corner of the display screen, and the figure 2 reservation number display part 660 indicates the special figure 2 reservation number. The number “1” is displayed and is 3 in total. In addition, three hold displays 633 are displayed in the hold display section 630 at the lower center of the display screen.

(A) in FIG. 65A is a display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the decorative first design A that is variably displayed in the left area 610A of the variability display area 610 is temporarily stopped. When the reach state occurs, -1 of the decorative first symbol A is displayed immediately before the decorative first symbol A temporarily stops during the variable display.
The design is hidden. In the left area 610 </ b> A of the variable display area 610, “2” is displayed as a special decoration pattern immediately before the first decorative pattern A temporarily stops.

Note that the timing at which the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol A is not displayed (erased) is different when the reach state occurs (FIG. 65A) and when the reach state does not occur (FIG. 63).
For example, in FIG. 65A, for example, the timing at which the symbol -1 of the decorative first symbol A is hidden is
It may be the timing when the whole or part of “2” of the decorative pattern 1 A is displayed on the display screen.
Thereby, it can be suggested that a reach state occurs. Similarly, the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbol A is not displayed immediately before the decorative first symbol A temporarily stops (not displayed from the beginning,
If displayed, delete it).

(N) in FIG. 65A is a display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the decorative first symbol B temporarily stops in the right region 610B after the decorative first symbol A temporarily stops in the left region 610A of the variable display region 610. is there. In the left region 610A, “2” of the decorative first pattern A is temporarily stopped, and the decorative first
The ± 1 symbols (“1”, “3”) of the symbol A are not displayed. When the reach state occurs, the decorative first graphic B is displayed even during the variable display of the right region 610B as in the left region 610A.
Immediately before the temporary stop, the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B is not displayed. Fluctuation display area 610
In the right area 610B, “2” is displayed as a decoration special symbol immediately before the decorative first symbol B temporarily stops.

Note that the timing at which the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B is not displayed (erased) is different when the reach state occurs (FIG. 65A) and when the reach state does not occur (FIG. 63).
For example, in FIG. 65A, the timing at which the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B is not displayed is the decorative first
The timing when the whole or a part of “2” of the symbol B is displayed on the display screen may be used. Thereby, it can be suggested that a reach state occurs. Similarly, the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B is not displayed immediately before the decorative first symbol B is temporarily stopped (not displayed from the beginning or erased when displayed).

(A) in FIG. 65A is a display screen of the display device 41 when the first design B is temporarily stopped in the right region 610B of the variable display region 610 and a reach state occurs. In the right region 610B, “2” of the decorative first symbol B is in a temporarily stopped state in the same manner as the decorative first symbol A of the left region 610A, and ± 1 symbol (“1”, “3” of the decorative first symbol A ") Is hidden. Further, when the reach state occurs, the reach effect is executed. For example, the character “reach” can be displayed on the display screen by the reach effect as shown in FIG.

(A) in FIG. 65A shows the first decorative symbols A to C and the variable display area 61 of the variable display area 610.
The decorative reduction symbol 5 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the main stop is performed. Middle front area 611
The symbol -1 of the decorative first symbol C ("3") displayed in C is immediately before the decorative first symbols A to C of the variable display region 610 and the decorative reduced symbol of the variable display region 615 are all stopped. , Hidden. For example, the timing at which the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol C is hidden (erased) may be the timing at which all or part of “3” of the decorative first symbol C is displayed on the display screen. Similarly, the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbol C is hidden (not displayed from the beginning or erased when it is displayed) immediately before the decorative first symbol C is permanently stopped.

(A) in FIG. 65A is a display screen of the display device 41 when the next special figure variation display game is started after the main stop of the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative reduced symbol. When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started as the next special figure fluctuation display game, each hold display 63 in the hold display section 630 is displayed.
3 is shifted to hold, and the number indicating the special figure 1 hold number displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display section 650 is switched from “2” to “1”. Note that the number indicating the special figure 2 hold number displayed in the special figure 2 hold number display section 660 remains “1”.

In addition, the hold shift of the hold display 633 to the hold digest area 640 is executed, and the hold display 633 located at the end of the hold display section 630 is changed from the hold display section 630 to the hold digest area 640.
Move to. The hold display 633 of the hold display unit 630 is changed from three to two.

When the next special-figure variation display game is started, a symbol (± 1 symbol) immediately before and after the ornament special symbol (decoration first symbol A to C) in the variation display area 610 is displayed and variation starts. The decorative special symbol and its ± 1 symbol are displayed in the same line in one direction (for example, the vertical direction) in the display screen.

[Screen transition example 1 when pseudo-continuous production occurs]
FIG. 65B is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the second embodiment, and is an example of screen transition of the entire game when a pseudo continuous effect occurs.

(B) in FIG. 65B is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display when the pseudo continuous production occurs from (b) in FIG. 65A, and the variation display is performed in the left region 610A of the variation display region 610. It is a display screen when the decoration 1st design A ("5") is temporarily stopped.

In (N ') of FIG. 65B, when the decorative first graphic A temporarily stops in the left region 610A, the decorative first
The symbol -1 of symbol A is not displayed. On the other hand, the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbol A is the stop symbol ("
6 ”) (see (F ′) of FIG. 65B), the +1 symbol (“ 6 ”) of the decorative first symbol A
) Is not hidden but part of it is displayed on the display screen.

(Ne ') in FIG. 65B shows the right area 6 of the variable display area 610 when the pseudo continuous production occurs.
Display device 41 when decorative first symbol B ("5") variably displayed at 10B temporarily stops
It is a display screen. The decorative first symbol A (“5”) and the decorative first symbol B (“5”) are aligned with the same symbol and temporarily stopped. When the decorative first symbol B is temporarily stopped in the right area 610B, the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B is not displayed and the decorative first symbol B is +1 in the same manner as the decorative first symbol A of the left region 610A. The display of a part of (“6”) is continued. The reason that the display of the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B is continued is because the +1 symbol becomes the main stop symbol (“6”) (FIG. 65B).
(See (Fu ')). In addition, the decorative first symbol C in the middle region 610C is a pseudo-ream dedicated symbol (“ream”).
) Is variably displayed, and “3” is variably displayed on the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol C.

(B) of FIG. 65B is a display of the display device 41 when the first unit variation display is finished in the pseudo continuous effect and the decorative first symbols A to C are pseudo-stopped (temporarily stopped). It is a screen.
When the decorative first symbols A to C are temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo-continuous effect, the decorative first symbol C in the middle region 610C is temporarily stopped in a state in which the pseudo continuous dedicated symbol ("ream") is displayed. ± of pattern C
One symbol is hidden. Note that the decorative reduced symbol in the variable display area 615 continues to be variable.

(B) in FIG. 65B is a display screen of the display device 41 when the second unit variation display is started in the pseudo continuous effect. When the second unit variation display is started in the pseudo continuous effect, the +1 symbol (“4”) of the first symbol C is redisplayed in the middle rear region 612C above the middle region 610C. In addition, in the case where the quasi-ream dedicated symbol ("ream") is displayed on the decorative first symbol C, the symbol +1 symbol ("3") after the decorative first symbol C is displayed as a symbol +1 ( “4”)
It is displayed in the middle rear region 612C of the rear variation display region 612. In the front variation display area 611, the -1 symbol ("3") is displayed in the middle front area 611C, but the -1 symbol is not displayed in the left front area 611A or the right front area 611B.

(H ') in FIG. 65B shows the display device 4 when the unit variation display is performed in the pseudo continuous effect.
1 is a display screen. As the unit variation display is resumed, the decorative first displayed as a temporary stop
The symbols A to C are displayed as normal fluctuations (“↓↓↓”). Note that the start-up memory is not consumed when the unit variation display is resumed in the pseudo-continuous production. Therefore, the reserved digestion region 64
The special figure change hold display 643 (special figure digestion hold display) displayed at 0 is in a state of being maintained as displayed on the pedestal.

(F ') in FIG. 65B is a display screen of the display device 41 when the unit variation display is resumed by the pseudo continuous effect and then temporarily stopped. The decorative first symbols A and B are the first decorative symbols A and B when the second unit variation display is started in the pseudo-continuous effect (see (ha ') in FIG. 65B).
Temporarily stopped again at the B + 1 symbol (“6”, “6”). In addition, the decorative first symbol C is temporarily stopped again with a pseudo-ream dedicated symbol ("ream"). Thereafter, the unit fluctuation display for the third time is started in the pseudo continuous effect, and the stop symbol is fixed. For example, when the stop symbol is confirmed at “666”, it is a big hit, and when it is confirmed at “626”, it is lost.

The temporary stop display may be performed again in the unit fluctuation display after the third time. In this case, for example, every time a temporary stop display is performed, the display screen is repeatedly changed in the order of FIG. 65B (h ') and (fu'), and when the present stop symbol is determined (fu ') The display screen is transitioned.

Note that the pseudo-continuous effect is different if the ± 1 symbol of the first design of the decoration when the pseudo-continuous effect occurs is different from the timing when the pseudo-continuous effect does not occur (FIGS. 63, 64, and 65A). Can be notified. In addition, the reach effect and the pseudo-continuous effect are common from the viewpoint that two of the same decorative first design A and B are arranged, so that ± 1 when the pseudo-continuous effect occurs
The timing at which the symbols are not displayed may be the same as when the reach in FIG. 65A occurs.

[Screen transition example 2 when pseudo-continuous production occurs]
FIG. 65C is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the second embodiment, and is another example of the screen transition of the entire game when a pseudo continuous effect occurs.

(C) in FIG. 65C is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display when the pseudo continuous production occurs from (b) in FIG. 65A, and varies in the left region 610A of the variation display region 610. It is a display screen when the decoration 1st design A ("3") currently displayed is temporarily stopped.

In (Nu) of FIG. 65C, when the decorative first pattern A stops in the left region 610A, the decorative first
Together with the -1 symbol ("2") of symbol A, the +1 symbol ("4") is also hidden. This is because the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbol A is not the main stop symbol (“8”) and is not necessary ((F ′ in FIG. 65C).
')reference).

(Ne) in FIG. 65C is a display device when the decorative first symbol B (“3”) that is variably displayed in the right area 610B of the variably display area 610 when the pseudo-continuous effect occurs is temporarily stopped. 4
1 is a display screen. The decorative first symbol A ("3") and the decorative first symbol B ("3") are aligned with the same symbol and temporarily stopped. When the decorative first symbol B is temporarily stopped in the right region 610B, the ± 1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B is not displayed in the same manner as the decorative first symbol A in the left region 610A. The +1 symbol (“4”) of the decorative first symbol B is not displayed because the +1 symbol is the stop symbol (“8”).
(Refer to (F '') in FIG. 65C). In addition, the pseudo-ream dedicated symbol (“ream”) is variably displayed in the decorative first symbol C of the middle region 610C, and “6” is displayed in the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol C.
"Is displayed in a variable manner.

(C) in FIG. 65C shows the display device 41 when the first unit variation display is finished in the pseudo continuous effect and the decorative first symbols A to C are pseudo-stopped (temporarily stopped). It is a display screen. 65 (C) is the same as (no) in FIG. 65C except that “3” and “3” are displayed on the decorative first symbols A and B, and the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbols A and B is not displayed. .

(C) in FIG. 65C is a display screen of the display device 41 when the second unit variation display is started in the pseudo continuous effect. When the second unit variation display is started in the pseudo-continuous effect, the decoration +1 symbol (“7”) of the first symbol C is displayed in the middle rear region 612C above the middle region 610C, and below the middle region 610C. -1 design ("6 of design 1 design C" in the middle front region 611C
") Is redisplayed. The ± 1 symbols of the decorative first symbols A and B are kept in a non-display state.

(H) in FIG. 65C is a display screen of the display device 41 when the unit variation display is performed in the pseudo continuous effect. By resuming the unit variation display, the decorative first symbols A to C that have been temporarily stopped as in (H ') of FIG. 65B become the normal variation display (“↓↓↓”). In addition, the decoration 1st design A and B which became non-display in (no '') from (nu '') of FIG. 65C
The ± 1 symbols (“2” and “4”) may be excluded from the variable display symbol arrays in the left region 610A and the right region 610B. That is, in FIG. 65C (h), the player can visually recognize that the identification information is fluctuated in the symbol arrangement in which “2” and “4” are omitted on the left and right of the display screen. "And" 4 "can be recognized not to be the stop symbols (" 8 ").

(F '') in FIG. 65C is a display screen of the display device 41 when the unit variation display is resumed by the pseudo continuous effect and then temporarily stopped. The decorative first symbols A and B are +1 of the decorative first symbols A and B that are not displayed when temporarily stopped by the first unit variation display in the pseudo continuous production.
Temporarily stopped again with symbols (“8”, “8”) different from symbols (“4”, “4”). The different symbol is a symbol that becomes the stop symbol.

In addition, the decorative first symbol C is temporarily stopped again with the pseudo-ream dedicated symbol (“ream”). after that,
The unit fluctuation display for the third time is started by the pseudo continuous effect, and the stop symbol is fixed. For example, when the stop symbol is confirmed at “888”, it is a big hit, and when it is confirmed at “838”, it is lost. In addition, in the unit fluctuation display after the third time, every time the temporary stop display is performed, the temporary stop display is performed again by changing the display screen in the order of FIG. 65C (ひ) and (ふ). It is good.

In addition, every time a pseudo-continuous effect is produced, ± 1 symbols of symbols to be temporarily stopped may be hidden and removed from the variable display symbol array. By doing in this way, every time the number of pseudo-continuous effects increases, the symbols to be stopped or the symbols to reach are narrowed down, so that even if the symbol of interest is variably displayed at high speed, it becomes easy to understand and the interest is improved. In addition, when the symbol to be narrowed is a probable variation symbol, it becomes easier to attract the player's attention, so that the interest can be further improved.

[Screen transition example 3 when pseudo-continuous production occurs]
FIG. 65D is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the second embodiment, and is a second another example of the screen transition of the entire game when a pseudo-continuous effect occurs. .

65D is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display when the pseudo continuous production occurs from (ni) in FIG. 65A. In the left region 610A of the variation display region 610, FIG. It is a display screen when the decoration 1st design A ("3") which is variably displayed is temporarily stopped. With the temporary stop of the decorative first symbol A, the ± 1 symbol (“2”, “4”) of the decorative first symbol A is not displayed (it may be difficult to visually recognize).

In FIG. 65D, (Ne ''') shows the decorative first symbols B and C (“4”, “4”, variably displayed in the right region 610B and the middle region 610C of the variable display region 610 when the pseudo continuous production occurs. "
4 ") is a display screen of the display device 41 when temporarily stopped. The same design ("4", "4") is displayed on the decorative first symbols B and C, and the symbol is, for example, the temporarily stopped decorative first symbol A
It is a symbol immediately after ("3").

As shown in FIG. 65D (Ne '''), the decorative first symbols B and C are temporarily stopped at the same time at positions where the rows are shifted so as not to be in a horizontal row with the temporarily stopped decorative first symbol A. The Therefore,
Since the decorative patterns 1 to C are different from the normal stop mode in which the decorative patterns 1 to C are arranged in a row in a horizontal row, the player can feel a sense of incongruity and have a sense of expectation that a pseudo continuous production will occur. .

Note that the decorative first symbols B and C that temporarily stop at a position shifted from the decorative first symbol A are the decorative first symbols.
The same symbol (“3”) or −1 symbol (“2”) as symbol A may be used. In this case, “3” of the decorative first symbols A to C is displayed on the display screen, but “3” is displayed at the position where the line is shifted.
”Is displayed, the player can determine that the decorative first symbols A to C are not arranged in an effective line relationship in a horizontal row, and can recognize that it is not a big hit.

In FIG. 65D, (''') is a pseudo-continuous production, and the first unit variation display ends, and the decoration first
It is a display screen of the display device 41 when symbols A to C are pseudo-stop-displayed (temporary stop display). Other than the point that “3” is displayed on the decorative first symbol A, “4” and “4” are displayed on the decorative first symbols B and C, and the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbols B and C is not displayed. Is (ne '''in Fig. 65D.
).

65D in FIG. 65D is a display screen of the display device 41 when the second unit variation display is started in the pseudo continuous effect. When the second unit fluctuation display is started in the pseudo continuous production,
In the rear right display area 612B and the middle rear area 612C of the rear variation display area 612, the +1 symbols (“5” and “5”) of the first designs B and C are displayed, respectively. The ± 1 symbol of the decorative first symbol A is maintained in a non-display state. Thereafter, the unit variation display of the pseudo-continuous effect is continued as shown in FIG.

[Screen transition example of the entire game when other effects are displayed]
FIG. 66A is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the second embodiment, and is an example of screen transition of the entire game when various effect displays occur.

(F) in FIG. 66A is a display screen of the display device 41 during special map fluctuation display. In FIG. 66A (
As shown in FIG. 5B, in the lower center of the display screen of the display device 41, a button operation promotion display (at a position overlapping at least one of the middle area 610C, the hold display section 630, or the hold digestion area 640 of the variable display area 610) (Operation promotion image) 670, warning display (warning image) 679,
Is displayed. The button operation promotion display (operation promotion image) 670 is a display that prompts the player to operate the effect button 25. The warning display (warning image) 679 is a display for giving a certain warning to the player, and here is a display for noting contact with a movable member provided on a frame such as the glass frame 15 or the like. The button operation promotion display 670 and the warning display 679 are displayed in the middle area 61.
It is arranged on the front surface (upper layer) with priority over the 0C decoration special symbol, the hold display section 630 and the hold digestion area 640.

In the upper right corner of the display screen, a firing position instruction display (launching position instruction character, right-handed instruction notification) 691 for instructing a right hand is displayed. In the lower left corner of the display screen, a remaining time display (remaining time characters) 673 for displaying the remaining time in the effect mode state in which a special effect can be generated is displayed. The production mode state includes, for example, a mission mode that presents an achievement condition such as “Let reach within 5 minutes!”, A mode that expects a latent probability change, and a pre-reading production mode based on a prior determination for hold. In the lower right corner of the display screen, a BGM display 674 for displaying the currently selected BGM.
Is displayed.

At the left end of the display screen, a specific game state display (for example, “RUSH”) indicating that a specific game state has occurred at a position overlapping the left region 610A of the variable display region 610 (
A specific game state image) 675 is displayed. The specific game state display 675 is arranged on the back surface (lower layer) of the left region 610A and is displayed without priority.

(A) in FIG. 66A is a display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the decorative first design A (“2”) that is variably displayed in the left area 610A of the variability display area 610 is temporarily stopped. As shown in (shi) of FIG. 63, a part of the display of the symbol -1 symbol ("1") of the ornament first symbol A in the left front region 611A immediately before the ornament first symbol A in the left region 610A temporarily stops. It disappears and the image (“RUSH”) of the specific game state display 675 displayed on the back of the -1 symbol can be recognized. Note that the -1 symbol (“1”) of the decorative first symbol A displayed in the left front area 611A is the decorative first symbol A.
All ("2") are hidden immediately before temporarily stopping. In addition, the +1 design of the decoration 1st design A is
It is not displayed in the left rear region 612A of the rear variation display region 612.

(A) in FIG. 66A is the left area 610A of the variable display area 610 and is decorated with the first design A (“2”).
) Is a display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the first decorative pattern B (“5”) temporarily stops in the right region 610B after the temporary stop. Similar to the temporary stop of the decorative first symbol A of the left area 610A, immediately before the decorative first symbol B of the right area 610B temporarily stops, the negative first symbol B of the decorative first symbol B of the right front area 611B ("4"). Part of the display disappears, and the BGM display 674 displayed at the position overlapping the -1 symbol becomes easy to recognize. Note that the -1 symbol (“4”) of the decorative first symbol B displayed in the right front area 611B is completely hidden immediately before the decorative first symbol B (“5”) temporarily stops. Further, the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B is not displayed in the right rear region 612B of the rear variation display region 612.

66A is a display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the decoration first symbol B is temporarily stopped in the middle region 610C after the decoration first symbol B is temporarily stopped in the right region 610B of the variable display region 610. FIG. is there. Similar to the temporary stop of the decorative first symbol A of the left region 610A and the decorative first symbol B of the right region 610B, the middle front region 611 immediately before the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative reduced symbol stop.
The display of the -1 symbol ("3") of the first symbol C of the ornament C is partially disappeared, and the button operation promotion display 670 and the warning display 679 displayed at a position overlapping the -1 symbol are easily recognized. Left region 610
In A, “2” of the decorative first symbol A is in a temporarily stopped state, and “5” in the decorative first symbol B is in a temporarily stopped state in the right region 610B.

(A) in FIG. 66A is a display screen of the display device 41 when the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display region 610 and the decorative reduced symbol in the display region 615 are stopped. The -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol C displayed in the middle front region 611C is not displayed immediately before the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative reduced symbol all stop. Further, the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbol C is not displayed in the middle rear region 612C of the rear variation display region 612.

(A) in FIG. 66A is a display screen of the display device 41 when the next special figure variation display game is started after the main stop of the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative reduced symbol. When the special figure 2 variable display game is started as the next special figure variable display game, the decorative first pattern A to the variable display area 610 is displayed.
C is displayed in a reverse fluctuation so as to temporarily go back to the upper side of the display screen (minus fluctuation), and a part of each -1 symbol is displayed in the previous fluctuation display area 611. Thereafter, the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed in a normal variation. Note that the decorative reduced symbols in the variable display area 615 are variably displayed in a normal manner in a variable manner that changes in order on the spot without scrolling.

The decorative first symbols A to C of the second embodiment described above are composed of a frame and a numeric part, but in addition to the frame and the numeric part, a character part and a decorative part of the frame are added to form one symbol. It may be configured. In this case, the character part and the decorative part of the frame may be hidden instead of hiding the pattern itself and making it difficult to view. Alternatively, the character portion, the decorative portion of the frame, or the frame may be hidden after reducing the design so that only the numeric portion can be seen. Further, since the time-short state (the normal power support state, the power support state) is a shortened variation (super shortened variation), the character portion and the frame decoration portion may not be displayed.

In the second embodiment, the temporarily stopped ornament 1st symbol A (left large symbol) and ornament 2nd symbol B (right large symbol) are added to the first ornamental symbol C (middle large symbol) as pseudo-continuous symbols and temporary symbols. Since it is not necessary to pay attention until the stop symbol is displayed, the ornamental first symbol C may be moved to the outer edge of the display screen of the display device 41 or reduced so that the first symbol C can be easily seen.

Also, in the second embodiment, the decorative first symbols A to C temporarily and temporarily stopped until the ± 1 symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C disappear or there is no room for display are maximized. One or both of the ± 1 symbols may be hidden.

Further, in the second embodiment, the ± 1 symbol of the decorative first symbols A to C that are temporarily stopped or permanently stopped may be hidden or made difficult to visually recognize on the basis of a pending change notice (prefetch notice effect). According to such an aspect, since it is possible to suppress the overlapping of the symbol and the hold display 633, it is possible to easily display the effect of the hold change notice.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the total number of holds is 0 after the decoration first symbols A to C are stopped, the next special figure variation display game is not started. As shown in (i), the non-display state of ± 1 symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C is continued.
However, even if the special figure variation display game is not being executed, a predetermined time has elapsed or a predetermined operation has been executed so that the player can easily understand that the game is not being executed or that the game can be performed. As a result, the ± 1 symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C are changed to, for example, (
It may be redisplayed as shown in FIG.

The predetermined time is, for example, when the production control device 300 receives the customer waiting demo command and the customer waiting demo is executed, or when a certain time has elapsed after the special figure variation display game ends.
It is judged that it has passed, and the ± 1 symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed again. The predetermined operation is, for example, a button operation for displaying a screen for checking a game history or a screen for adjusting volume or brightness when the special figure variation display game is not executed (operation of the effect button 25). Is performed, it is determined that it has been executed, and the ± 1 symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed again.
It should be noted that when an operation for turning off the screen for confirming the displayed game history and the screen for adjusting the volume or brightness is performed, it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed, and the ± One symbol may be redisplayed.

According to such an aspect, when the special figure variation display is not executed, the player can easily understand that the game is not executed and that the game can be performed.

[Modification]
As a modification of the second embodiment described above, the following configuration may be employed.

In the second embodiment, the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed in the horizontal display in the variable display area 610. However, as shown in FIG. 66B, the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed horizontally. You may display so that it may line up in three lines of directions. That is, only one line in the horizontal direction of the decorative first symbols A to C in the second embodiment is completely displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. It is a line.

FIG. 66B is a screen transition diagram showing, in time series, the display screen of the display device 41 when the decorative first symbol is displayed in a plurality of lines in the modification of the second embodiment. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the second embodiment.

As shown in (Y) of FIG. 66B, the variable display area 610 according to the modification of the second embodiment is
Divided into 3 × 3 areas (upper left area 610A1, left middle area 610A2, lower left area 610A3, upper right area 610B1, right middle area 610B2, lower right area 610B3, middle upper area 610C1, middle middle area 610C2, middle lower area 610C3) 1st pattern A on each area
-C is variably displayed.

Moreover, the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbols A to C according to the modification of the second embodiment is the variable display area 6.
This is a design one after the first design A to C of the upper 10 regions (upper left region 610A1, upper right region 610B1, middle upper region 610C1). Similarly, the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbols A to C according to the modification of the second embodiment is a lower region (lower left region 610A3,
The lower right area 610B3 and the middle lower area 610C3) are the symbols one before the decorative first symbols A to C.

In the second embodiment, the display in which the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative reduced symbol are variably displayed is displayed as “↓↓↓”. However, as shown in FIG. In the modification of the form, the decorative first symbols A to C being displayed in 3 × 3 are displayed in 3 × 3 so that the variable display region 610 is an area of 3 rows × 3 columns (3 × 3). Yes.

(Y) of FIG. 66B is a display screen of the display device 41 when the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative reduced symbol are stopped. The ± 1 symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C according to the modification of the second embodiment are not displayed as in the second embodiment. The ± 1 symbols of the first symbols A to C may be made difficult to visually recognize.

Also in the special figure variation display game according to the modification of the second embodiment, a pseudo continuous effect can be performed as in the second embodiment. Specifically, as in FIGS. 65B and 65C of the second embodiment, a pseudo-continuous effect may be performed using the pseudo-ream dedicated symbol (“ream”). Similarly to FIG. 65D of the second embodiment, The pseudo-continuous effect may be performed by temporarily stopping the three rows of decorative first symbols B and C at positions where the rows are shifted so as not to be in a horizontal row with the three rows of decorative first symbols A. Also, in the pseudo-continuous production according to the modified example, as in the second embodiment, the decorative first graphic A
~ C + 1 symbols (designs one after the first ornaments A to C in the upper region of the variable display area 610) and -1 symbols of ornament first symbols AC (the lower part of the variable display region 610) The display of the region's decorations 1 to A before C) may be hidden or in a visually difficult state, and the ± 1 symbols that have been hidden may be removed from the variable display symbol array.

Also with the gaming machine 10 according to the modified example of the second embodiment, the same operational effects as the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment can be obtained, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Operation and Effect of Second Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment displays a plurality of pieces of identification information (decoration special symbols (decoration first symbols A to C) and ornament reduction symbols) in a plurality of columns based on the establishment of the start condition. Display means (display device 41) capable of displaying a game (special-figure display game) and effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing effects related to the variable display game are provided.
The effect control means (the effect control device 300) can execute stop control that causes the predetermined identification information during the variable display to be in the stop state (the main stop state), and the predetermined control during the variable display is performed before the stop control is executed. The identification information (-1 symbol or +1 symbol) displayed in the same row as the identification information and displayed before or after the variable display direction with respect to the predetermined identification information is less visible than the predetermined identification information (for example, Display or hide in a state of increased transparency.

According to such a gaming machine 10, it becomes easier to see a mode in which the hold display 633 of the hold display unit 630 and the hold display during the special figure change in the hold digestion area 640 are held and shifted at the time of the main stop, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to. In particular, even when an effect display or the like is displayed on the display screen as shown in FIG. 66A, the effect display can be attracted to attract the player's attention at the time of the main stop, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be made.

Further, the production control means (production control device 300) can execute temporary stop control that causes the predetermined identification information being displayed to be changed to a temporary stop state different from the stop state, and the variable before the temporary stop control is executed. The identification information (-1 symbol or +1 symbol) displayed before or after the variable display direction with respect to the predetermined identification information being displayed is displayed or hidden in a state in which it is more difficult to view than the predetermined identification information. . Therefore, at the time of temporary stop, the hold display of the hold display unit 630 and the hold digestion area 6
At 40, it is easy to see the on-hold display during special figure change during digestion, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, even when an effect display or the like is displayed on the display screen as shown in FIG. 66A,
At the time of the temporary stop as well as the temporary stop, the effect display can be conspicuous and the player's attention can be attracted, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) matches the identification information that is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop control with the identification information that is stopped by the stop control, and stops before the temporary stop control is executed. The identification information (-1 symbol or +1 symbol) displayed before or after the variable display direction with respect to the identification information to be in a state is displayed in a state that is less visible than the identification information to be in a stopped state.
Or hide it. Therefore, it is possible to avoid difficulty in visually recognizing other displays due to the identification information displayed before or after the temporarily stopped identification information at the time of temporary stop, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, according to such an aspect, at the time of temporary stop, the player
It becomes easier to recognize the temporarily stopped identification information than the identification information displayed before or after the identification information. The player can determine that the identification information to be temporarily stopped and the identification information to be stopped are the same, so that the identification information recognized at the time of the temporary stop is the identification information to be permanently stopped. And the progress of the game can be easily understood, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the ± 1 symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C are not displayed or are difficult to visually recognize, so that the player can easily recognize the symbols to be stopped or temporarily stopped. Furthermore, since the ± 1 symbol is not displayed or is difficult to view, it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the content of the warning display 679, so that the content of the warning display 679 can be easily recognized and the warning can be handled smoothly. become. In addition, in the gaming machine 10, it is possible to suppress the overlay of the ± 1 symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C on a specific screen display (proactive display image) such as the hold display 633, so that the decorativeness is ensured and effective. Can produce realistic effects and improve interest.

[Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 72. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first embodiment and the second embodiment.

[Single-shot command processing of the third embodiment]
Next, the details of the single command processing (B1212) of the third embodiment in the received command analysis processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 shows the production control device 300.
5 is a flowchart showing a procedure of single-shot command processing executed by. B1
The processing from 301 to B1322 is the same as the processing in the first embodiment described above (FIG. 35).
reference).

The effect control device 300 according to the third embodiment sets the game state flag to the normal state after all the symbols are stopped (B1322), executes the effect setting process during stop (B1323), and performs the single-shot command process. finish.

[Stage production setting process]
With reference to FIG. 68, the details of the during-stop effect setting process (B1323) in the single-shot command process of the third embodiment described above will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the stopping effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first sets the non-display timing of the large symbol (identification information, decorative special symbol (decoration first symbol AC)) (B2501), and then displays the small symbol during the stop display. The non-display timing of the symbols (identification information, ornament reduced symbols (decoration second symbol)) is set (B2502).

Next, the production control device 300 displays the hold display being displayed (the hold display 633 of the hold display unit 630).
The setting of the non-display timing of the special figure changing hold display 643 of the hold digestion area 640 is performed (
B2503). Here, the non-display timing of the hold number display may be set.

And the production control device 300 shows that the display result of the special figure variation display game is a special result (big hit)
It is determined whether or not (B2504).

When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the effect control device 300 sets the appearance timing (display timing) at which the fanfare background (background used during the fanfare) appears (B2505), and then After setting the display mode and appearance mode of the fanfare background (B2506), the stopping effect setting process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure variation display game is not a big hit, the effect control device 300 ends the stopped effect setting process.

[Timing chart of display when a big hit is made]
Next, a change in the display mode of the display screen when a big hit is made will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a timing chart for explaining a change in display mode over time when a big hit occurs on the display screen of the display device 41 of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 69, during the special figure variation display game, the decorative first symbols A to C (large symbols, special decorative symbols), the decorative second symbols (small symbols, reduced decorative symbols), and the number of holds displayed (special symbols) 1 Hold number display part 6
50 or display of special figure 2 hold number display section 660), standby hold display (hold display 633), and special figure changing hold display 643 (special figure digestion hold display) are displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. Yes. On the other hand, the fanfare background 680 and the “big hit” character 681 are not displayed on the display screen but are not displayed.

Time T1 is the time when the symbol stop command is received by the effect control device 300 (B1319), and the special-figure display game being executed changes and stops. When the special figure change display game stops changing at time T1, the special figure change hold display 643 is hidden. At that time, for example, the pedestal indicating the reserved digestion area 640 may remain displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game becomes a big hit, the display mode of the display screen changes as follows. In this case, it is desirable that the pedestal indicating the reserved digestion area 640 is not displayed at the timing when the decorative first symbols A to C, which will be described later, are hidden or when the big hit display is started.

A period from time T1 to time T2 is a game result confirmation period A in which the result of the special figure variation display game can be confirmed. In the game result confirmation period A, the display of the stopped symbols (identification information) is maintained in the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative second symbol so that the player can check the result of the special-figure display game. ing. Further, in the game result confirmation period A, a suggestion effect that suggests the occurrence of a special gaming state is executed, and the fanfare background 680 starts to be displayed.

Time T2 is the time when the special game transition period B for transitioning to the special game state is started. When the special game transition period B is started at time T2, the decorative first symbols A to C and the standby hold display are hidden. In addition, the period consisting of the game result confirmation period A and the special game transition period B is the display time set in step A4703 (decoration special figure change waiting time, stop display time).
Or, it corresponds to the display time set in step B1321 (decorative figure variation standby time, stop display time). Note that the display time set in step A4703 and the display time set in step B1321 are basically the same.

At time T3, a fanfare command is received by the effect control device 300 (B2101).
This is the time when the fanfare display period C for performing fanfare display is started.
The fanfare display period C is a time corresponding to the fanfare time set in the special chart display processing (FIG. 23) (A4821). At time T3, the fanfare display period C is started, so that the big hit display for notifying the big hit is also started. When the big hit display is started, a “big hit” character 681 for notifying the big hit is displayed as the big hit display. In addition, the decorative second symbol and the number of hold display are hidden.

Time T4 is the time when the fanfare display period C ends and the big hit round in the special gaming state (big hit state) is started. At time T4, the fanfare background 680 and the “big hit” character 681 are hidden.

In this embodiment, the start of the big hit display may be regarded as the start of the special gaming state, and the start of the big hit round may be regarded as the start of the special gaming state.

[Example of screen transition when a big hit occurs]
FIG. 70 is a screen transition diagram showing, in chronological order, the display screen of the display device 41 when a big hit is made in the third embodiment.

(R) of FIG. 70 is a display screen of the display device 41 in the special figure variation display game before the big hit. In FIG. 70 (r), with the execution of the special figure variation display game, the decoration first symbol A to C is displayed in the variation display area 610, and the decoration second symbol (small pattern, decoration reduction symbol) is displayed in the variation display area 615. Fluctuation is displayed.

(R) of FIG. 70 is a display screen of the display device 41 immediately after the start of the game result confirmation period A after the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative second symbol to be variably displayed are stopped. In the fluctuation display area 610 and the fluctuation display area 615, a stop display of “777” indicating that the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit is stopped and displayed as a decoration first symbol A to C or a decoration second symbol. ing. Therefore, the player can confirm the result of the special figure variation display game during the game result confirmation period A.

(Ru) of FIG. 70 is a display screen of the display device 41 when a suggestion effect that suggests the occurrence of a special gaming state (big hit state) is executed during the game result confirmation period A and the fanfare background 680 starts to be displayed. . Unlike the “big hit” character 681, the fanfare background 680 functions indirectly as a first notification image that indirectly suggests that a special gaming state has occurred, that is, implicitly notifies the occurrence of the special gaming state. The first notification image is a mode (for example, a lively mode) that causes the player to expect that it will be a big hit, but does not include information directly indicating a big hit like the “hit” character 681. The fanfare background 680 is displayed on the back surface (lower layer) of the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615. Therefore,
The fanfare background 680 does not hide the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative second symbol.

In FIG. 70 (ru), the fanfare background 680 is displayed in a manner of being slid on the display screen (slide-in display), but may be displayed in other effects. For example, the entire fanfare background 680 may be displayed all at once in the display screen (
(Pop-up display), a part of the display screen may be cut off (cut-in display).

The decorative second pattern of the variable display area 615 may be displayed at the left end of the display screen so that it does not overlap the fanfare background 680 that is slid in from the right end of the display screen. By setting the display position in this way, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the decorative second pattern and the fanfare background 680 of the variable display area 615. Further, when the decorative second design of the variable display area 615 is displayed on the right end of the display screen as in the above embodiment, the fanfare background 680 may be displayed in a slide-in manner from the left end of the display screen. Even in such an aspect, it is possible to avoid the decorative second pattern of the variable display area 615 and the fanfare background 680 from overlapping each other.

Furthermore, the fanfare background 680 can be displayed in a manner as shown in FIG. 70 (ru), thereby avoiding overlapping with the standby hold display (hold display 633) and the special figure changing hold display 643. It should be noted that the fanfare background 680 is displayed behind the standby hold display or the special drawing changing hold display 643 in a mode (for example, a rectangular frame filled with a single color) that makes the standby hold display or the special drawing changing hold display 643 easily visible. ), The standby hold display and the special figure changing hold display 643 may be made conspicuous.

70 (re) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special game transition period B is started. When the special transition period B is started, the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are not displayed. Further, the entire fanfare background 680 is displayed on the display screen, and the decorative first symbols A to C are not displayed, so that the player can easily recognize the fanfare background 680. Further, the standby hold display (hold display 633) is hidden.

70 (b) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the fanfare display period C is started. When the fanfare display period C is started, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the front of the fanfare background 680 (upper layer) is a “hit” character that directly informs the player that it will be a big win. 681 is displayed. Unlike the fanfare background 680, the “hit” character 681 functions as a second notification image that directly notifies that a special gaming state has occurred, that is, explicitly notifies the occurrence of the special gaming state. The variable display area 6
15 decoration 2 designs, special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 hold number display, special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 hold number display, hold display unit 630 standby hold display (hold display 633) The suspended digestion area 640 is hidden. Therefore, the player can easily watch the “big hit” character 681 highlighted on the display screen. Further, if the display of the decorative second symbol remains at the timing when the “big hit” character 681 is displayed, the player may misunderstand the gaming state, but the decorative second symbol is not displayed. The player does not misunderstand the gaming state.

FIG. 70 (wa) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the fanfare display period C ends and the big hit round in the special gaming state (big hit state) is started. When the big hit round is started, the fanfare background 680 and the “hit” character 681 are hidden. The display screen also includes a firing position instruction display 691 for instructing a right-handed strike, a round display 676 indicating the current round (“1R”), and a special symbol variation display game stop symbol (
A jackpot stop symbol display 677 indicating “7”) and a game point 678 corresponding to the number of game balls (game value) acquired (given) at the time of the jackpot are displayed.

[Modification of timing chart of display when a big hit is made]
Next, a modified example of the display mode of the display screen when a big hit will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a timing chart for explaining a change in display mode over time when a big hit occurs on the display screen of the display device 41 according to the modification of the third embodiment. In addition,
In the following description of FIG. 71, the description overlapping with FIG. 69 is omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 71, in the timing chart of the modified example of the third embodiment, time T2 ′ is adopted instead of time T2 at which the special game transition period B is started. Time T2 ′ is the time when the special game type confirmation period B ′ for confirming the type of the special game state is started. Note that the period consisting of the game result confirmation period A and the special game type confirmation period B ′ is step A4.
The display time set in 703 (the waiting time for the decoration special figure change, the stop display time), step B
This corresponds to the display time set in 1321 (the waiting time for decoration special figure fluctuation, the stop display time).

When the special game type confirmation period B ′ is started at time T2 ′, the hold number display is hidden together with the decorative first symbols A to C and the standby hold display, and the fanfare background 680 is displayed.
Accordingly, only the decorative second symbol and the fanfare background 680 are displayed on the display screen, and the player can easily watch the fanfare background 680 together with the stop symbol of the decorative second symbol.

[Modified example of screen transition when a big hit]
FIG. 72 shows a screen transition in which the display screen of the display device 41 in which the fanfare background 680 and the “hit” character 681 are displayed in different display modes according to the type of jackpot is shown in time series in the variation of the third embodiment. FIG. In the following description of FIG. 72, the description overlapping with FIG. 70 will be omitted as appropriate.

72 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special game type confirmation period B ′ is started and a super-hit effect (super-hit display) is generated from (ri) of FIG. During the special game type confirmation period B ′ when the super-hit effect occurs, as shown in FIG. 72 (Ru), the fanfare background 68 suggests the occurrence of the super-hit effect and the super-hit (probable big hit).
0A is displayed as a slide-in.

For example, when the number of big hit rounds is large (for example, in the case of 16R), or when the special game state ends (for example, big hit) the probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, big hit) is high (probability variation state, probability variation state). It is an effect displayed on the screen. Therefore, when the stop symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative second symbol are probabilistic jackpot symbols (for example, “777”) that suggest the transition to the probabilistic state after the special gaming state is finished, the super jackpot effect Can be generated. In addition, even when the stop symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative second symbol are normal jackpot symbols (for example, “666”) that do not suggest the transition to the probable change state after the special game state ends,
When the number of big hit rounds is large (for example, in the case of 16R) or when a promotion effect to a probable big hit occurs during a special gaming state, a super big hit effect can be generated.

FIG. 72 (re ′) shows the display screen of the display device 41 after the fanfare background 680A is displayed in a slide-in manner during the special game type confirmation period B ′ when the super-hit effect occurs. The fanfare background 680A that suggests the occurrence of a super-hit effect is displayed, for example, in a wavy shape with one side depicting a sine curve.

FIG. 72 (ro ′) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the fanfare display period C starts and a super-hit effect occurs. When the fanfare display period C starts and a super-hit effect is generated, as shown in FIG. 72 (ro '), a “super-hit” character 681A is displayed on the front surface (upper layer) of the fanfare background 680A, and the display is changed. Second decoration in area 615
The symbol (“777”) is not displayed. Therefore, the player is highlighted on the display screen.
It becomes easy to pay attention to the “super big hit” character 681A. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (wa), the big hit round in the special gaming state is started.

(Ru) in FIG. 72 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special game type confirmation period B ′ is started and a big hit effect (hit display) is generated from (R) in FIG. During the special game type confirmation period B ′ when the big hit effect occurs, as shown in FIG. 72 (Ru ”), the fanfare background 680B suggesting the occurrence of the big hit effect and the big hit (usually big hit) is displayed as a slide-in display. Is done.

The jackpot effect is, for example, a normal gaming state (normal state) in which the probability of a special result (for example, a big hit) is low after the big hit round number is small (for example, in the case of 5R) or the special gaming state is ended.
It is an effect displayed when transitioning to. Therefore, when the decorative symbols 1 to C and the decorative symbols 2 stop symbols are normal jackpot symbols (for example, “666”) that do not suggest the transition to the probable change state after the special gaming state ends, the special gaming state It is possible to generate a jackpot effect that does not suggest a transition to the probability change state after the end of the process. A big hit effect can also be generated when the number of big hit rounds is small (for example, in the case of 5R).

72 is a display screen of the display device 41 after the fanfare background 680B is slide-in displayed during the special game type confirmation period B ′ when the big hit effect occurs. The fanfare background 680B that suggests the occurrence of the big hit effect is displayed, for example, as if one corner thereof is cut off obliquely. The fanfare background 680B only needs to be displayed in a manner that can be distinguished from the fanfare background 680A that suggests the occurrence of a super-hit effect, and can be displayed in a shape, pattern, or color different from the fanfare background 680A or a combination thereof. .

72 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the fanfare display period C starts and a big hit effect is generated. When the fanfare display period C starts and a jackpot effect is generated, as shown in FIG. 72 (ro ''), a “hit” character 681B is displayed on the front surface (upper layer) of the fanfare background 680B, and a variable display area is displayed. The second decorative pattern 615 (“666”) is hidden. Therefore, the player can easily watch the “big hit” character 681B highlighted on the display screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (wa), the big hit round in the special gaming state is started.

As described above, the fanfare background 680 (680A, 680B) according to the modification of the third embodiment.
) And “big hit” characters 681 (681A, 681B) are the types of jackpots to be generated (types).
Depending on the, the display mode is different. For example, the type of jackpot is a type related to probability variation jackpot / normal jackpot or the number of rounds. Therefore, the type of jackpot (type) generated from the type of the fanfare background 680 during the special game type confirmation period B ′ is suggested, and the type of jackpot (type) generated from the type of the “hit” character 681 during the fanfare display period C. ), It is possible to notify the player of the type of jackpot before the special gaming state (big hit state) is started. Therefore, the player can identify the type of jackpot from the types of the fanfare background 680 and the “hit” character 681 together with the stop symbol of the decorative second pattern. In addition, the player can play the fanfare background 680 before the special gaming state is started.
Since the type of the big hit can be identified from the type of the “big hit” character 681, what kind of production is expected to occur with respect to the production during the big hit (the jackpot promotion production or the mode transition production that shifts after the big hit ends). Or it can be prepared in advance.

In the third embodiment described above, in addition to the above-described aspects, the decorative first symbols A to C, the decorative second symbol, the hold count display, the standby hold display (hold display 633), or the special figure changing hold display 6
The timing of non-display such as 43 may be changed as appropriate.

For example, when a hold change effect by a pre-reading notice (holding change notice, etc.) is performed and a big hit is made, a timing at which the standby hold display (hold display 633) or the special figure changing hold display 643 is not displayed (FIG. 69). (See T1 and T2) may be delayed and not displayed at the same timing (see T3 in FIG. 69) as the decorative second symbol or the number of holdings.

In this way, by disabling the standby hold display at the same timing as the decorative pattern 2 and display of the number of holds, it is possible to provide time for grasping the position of the changed standby hold display and the time of digestion. it can. Therefore, even if the changed standby hold display is returned to the normal display mode after the big hit, the player can grasp the standby hold display and expect a game corresponding to the standby hold display. Can have.

In addition, it is time to grasp what kind of on-hold display mode is a big hit by hiding the on-display display 643 during the special figure change that has been changed by the on-hold change effect at the same timing as the decorative second figure and the on-hold display. Can be provided. Therefore, when it becomes the same holding | maintenance display aspect next, since a player can have a good impression in the said holding | maintenance display aspect and can have an expectation, the interest of a game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment described above, the fanfare background 680 and the “big hit” character 6
81 may be displayed in a special display form having a shape, a pattern, a color, or the like different from the normal display form when the big hit is continuously generated a predetermined number of times or more. For example, as a special display mode, the shape and pattern of the fanfare background 680 may be changed and displayed. Further, as a special display mode, the color or font of the “big hit” character 681 may be changed (for example, displayed in a large gold color), or a character such as “congratulations” may be additionally displayed along with the “big hit” character 681. .

In addition, in the third embodiment described above, the sound output mode of the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b) when the fanfare background 680 is displayed and when the “big hit” character 681 is displayed ( Volume, frequency, etc.) may be changed.

For example, “big hit” rather than the speaker volume when the fanfare background 680 is displayed
By increasing the speaker volume when the character 681 is displayed, it is possible to clearly notify that it is a big hit state. In addition, since the speaker volume when the “big hit” character 681 is displayed is large, for example, when the type or round number of the big hit is notified by the sound of the speaker after the “big hit” character 681 is displayed, The player can easily hear the notification.

It should be noted that the speaker volume when the fanfare background 680 is displayed is made larger than the speaker volume when the “hit” character 681 is displayed, thereby emphasizing the effect before the notification of the big hit state. Also good.

Further, the change in the sound output mode of the speaker is not limited to the volume, but may be a change in the frequency (pitch) of a predetermined sound notified from the gaming machine 10. Fanfare Background 680
By displaying the sound frequency notified when the “hit” character 681 is displayed higher than the sound frequency notified when the “hit” is displayed, the player can display the “hit” character 681 and the number of rounds. It can appeal that the suggestion of

In addition, it is notified that it is a big hit state by making the frequency of the sound notified when the fanfare background 680 is displayed larger than the frequency of the sound notified when the “big hit” character 681 is displayed. You may emphasize the production before it is done.

Furthermore, the frequency of the sound that is notified when the “big hit” character 681 is displayed may be equal to or lower than a predetermined frequency. In this way, by making the sound notified when the “big hit” character 681 is displayed low (heavy bass), together with the speaker normally used in the gaming machine 10, a woofer provided at a position different from the speaker. Since the sound quality of the sound notified from the (speaker in charge of bass reproduction) changes and is heard, it is possible to make the player easily aware of the notified sound. Further, by reducing the sound that is notified when the “big hit” character 681 is displayed, the speaker, the surrounding air, the gaming machine 10 and the like can be vibrated. It is possible to appeal that the display of the “big hit” character 681 and the suggestion of the number of rounds will start.

[Operation and Effect of Third Embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the identification information (decoration special symbol (decoration first symbol A to C, large symbol), ornament reduction symbol (decoration second symbol A to C, small) based on the establishment of the start condition. Display means (display device 4) capable of displaying a variable display game (special graphic variable display game)
1) and effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing effects related to the variable display game
And). The gaming machine 10 can generate a special game state (big hit state) that gives a player a game value when the display result of the variable display game becomes a special result (big hit). The display means (display device 41) displays first identification information (decoration special symbol (decoration first symbol A to C, large symbol)) as identification information and a size different from the first identification information. Second identification information (decoration reduced symbols (decoration second symbols A to C, small symbols)) can be displayed. The production control means (production control device 300) suggests the occurrence of a special gaming state when the first identification information and the second identification information that are variably displayed are stopped and the display result of the variation display game is a special result. While the suggestion effect is executed, while the suggestion effect is being executed, the first identification information that is stopped and displayed is hidden, while the display of the second identification information that is stopped and displayed is maintained.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the player can be prepared for occurrence of the special gaming state by the suggestion effect suggesting the occurrence of the special gaming state. For example, when the suggestion effect occurs, the player can pull out the ball of the lower plate 23 or exchange a box (so-called dollar box) into which the acquired game ball is placed with an empty one. Further, since the identification information continues to be displayed for a while even after the display result of the variable display game becomes a special result, the player can check the result of the special figure variable display game.

Even during the suggestion production, the second identification information (decoration design (decoration design 2 A to C, small design)
) Is maintained, the player can confirm the result of the special figure variation display game from the stop pattern of the second identification information, and can improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the first design A to C on the display screen is hidden during the execution of the suggestion effect, the player can easily see the image (fanfare background 680) that suggests the occurrence of the special gaming state, The interest of the game can be improved.

The effect control means (effect control device 300) also displays a first notification image (fanfare background 680) that implicitly notifies the occurrence of the special gaming state (big hit state) as the suggestion effect, and the display of the first notification image. A second notification image (“big hit” character 681) that explicitly notifies the occurrence of the special gaming state after the start is displayed on the display means (display device 41). Therefore, since the player can confirm that the special game state has occurred in the second notification image after increasing the expectation for the occurrence of the special game state in the first notification image, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, since the suggestion effect can be executed in two stages of the display of the first notification image and the display of the second notification image, the suggestion effect can be lengthened and the player can be prepared for the occurrence of the special gaming state. .

The effect control means (effect control device 300) displays the second notification image ("big hit" character 681),
It is displayed on the display means (display device 41) in a mode ("super big hit" character 681A, "big hit" character 681B) that can identify the type of the special gaming state (big hit state). Therefore, the player
Since the type of jackpot can be identified from the type of the second notification image before the special gaming state is started, it is prepared in advance what kind of effect is expected to occur for the effect during the jackpot Can improve the interest of the game.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 80. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to third embodiments.

[Production control device of the fourth embodiment]
FIG. 73 is a block diagram showing an effect control device 300 constituting the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, a board connected to the effect control device 300, and the like. As shown in FIG. 73, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a power supply device 400, a game control device 100 (game control means, not shown), and an effect control device 300 (effect control means). The board surface relay board 915, the frame relay board 916, the cooling fan 45, the LVDS board 918, the ROM board 920, etc. are harnesses and connectors (CN).
It takes the form of being connected through.

The production control device 300 is connected to a power supply device 400 and is connected to a direct current power supply (32V, 15V, 12
V, 5V), power failure monitoring signal (5V), and reset signal (5V) are input. The effect control device 300 can be connected to an analysis port 955 or the like.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a voltage generation unit 800 (voltage generation means). The voltage generation unit 800 is supplied with 1.05V, 1.5V from a DC power supply (5V) from the power supply device 400.
Generate an output voltage of 3.3V. Details of the voltage generation unit 800 will be described later.

The board relay board 915 is between the board motor driver 44a (part of the board effect device 44), the board motor sensor 47a (direction effect switch 47), and the board decoration LED driver 46a (part of the board decoration device 46). It is a relay board for transmitting and receiving signals. The board surface relay board 9
15 includes a direct current power supply (32V, 15V,
12V, 5V).

The frame relay board 916 includes a frame motor driver 44b (part of the frame effect device), an effect button switch 25a, a frame motor sensor 47b, a first frame speaker (upper speaker 19a), a second frame speaker (lower speaker 19b), a frame It is a relay board for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the decoration LED driver (a part of the frame decoration device 18). Also, the effect control device 30 is provided on the frame relay board 916.
DC power (12V, 5V) is supplied from the power supply device 400 via 0.

The cooling FAN 45 is supplied from the power supply device 400 via the effect control device 300 with a DC power supply (12V
) Is supplied.

The LVDS substrate 918 is a relay substrate that relays the effect control device 300 and the display device 41. The LVDS board 918 is supplied with DC power (32V, 12V, 5V) from the power supply device 400 via the effect control device 300. Further, the LVDS substrate 918 has a voltage generator 8.
A DC power supply (3.3 V) is supplied from 00 and the DC power supply is output to the display device 41.

A power generation circuit 919 can be provided on the LVDS substrate 918. Power generation circuit 9
19 converts the DC power supply (32V) supplied from the power supply device 400 into a DC power supply (12V), and outputs it to the display device 41 (LED backlight 917). Thus, the power generation circuit 919 can be designed according to the standard of the display device 41 to be connected. Even when the display device 41 is replaced, it is necessary to modify the effect control device 300 only by replacing the LVDS board 918. Therefore, the display device 41 can be easily replaced accordingly.

The ROM substrate 920 includes an image ROM 325, and outputs image information stored in the image ROM 325 to the VDP 312 (video display processor). A direct current power supply (3.3 V) is supplied from the voltage generator 800 to the ROM substrate 920.

The effect control device 300 includes a first VDP-RAM 923 (storage means) and a second VDP-R.
An AM 924 (storage means) is provided. First VDP-RAM 923 and second VDP-
The RAM 924 is a storage medium that temporarily stores image information (moving images and still images) decoded by the VDP 312, and operates when a DC power supply (1.5 V) is supplied from the voltage generation unit 800.

The VDP 312 (general-purpose port 942) constituting the effect control device 300 performs signal transmission / reception with the outside by a 3.3V signal. However, the built-in host CPU constituting the VDP 312
(CPU 311, image processing means, VDP core, arithmetic processing means) operate at 1.05 V,
The DRAM I / F 940 connected to the first VDP-RAM 923 (storage means) and the second VDP-RAM 924 (storage means) operates at 1.5V. Therefore, the VDP 312 operates when a DC power supply (1.05 V, 1.5 V, 3.3 V) is supplied from the voltage generation unit 800.

As the input side of the VDP 312, the effect control device 300 includes a level conversion circuit 9 that performs level conversion (5.0 V → 3.3 V) of the signal of the power supply device 400 (power failure monitoring signal, reset signal).
21. Level conversion of signal of game control device 100 (effect command) (5.0V → 3.3V)
Level conversion circuit 922 for performing the level conversion of signals from the board motor sensor 47a (5.0
Level conversion circuit 926 for performing V → 3.3V), level conversion circuit 929 for performing level conversion (5.0V → 3.3V) of signals from the effect button switch 25a and the frame motor sensor 47b.
Is provided.

Further, as the output side of the VDP 312, the effect control device 300 includes a board surface relay board 915 (
Level conversion of signals transmitted to the board motor driver 44a and board motor sensor 47a (3)
. Level conversion circuit 925 for performing 3V → 5.0V) and level conversion (3.3V → 5.0V) of the signal transmitted to frame relay board 916 (frame motor driver 44b, effect button switch 25a, frame motor sensor 47b). Level conversion of the signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 (LED backlight 917) via the level conversion circuit 928 and the LVDS substrate 918 (3.3V → 5.
0V) is provided.

Furthermore, for the bidirectional communication of the VDP 312, the effect control device 300 includes a panel decoration LE.
Level shift of signal transmitted bidirectionally by D driver 46a and I2C communication system (3.3
Level shift circuit 927 which performs V⇔5.0V) and frame decoration LED driver (decoration device 18)
a) Level shift (3.3V⇔5.0V) of signals transmitted in both directions by I2C communication method
) Is provided.

The direct current power supply (15V) from the power supply device 400 is supplied to the effect control device 300, and VD
An amplifier circuit 337 (first amplifier circuit 930) for amplifying the audio data output from P312;
, A second amplifier circuit 931) is provided. The first amplifier circuit 930 outputs the amplified audio data to the first frame speaker (upper speaker 19a), and the second amplifier circuit 931 outputs the amplified audio data to the second frame speaker (lower speaker 19b). To do.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a protection circuit 933 that stabilizes the LVDS signal output from the VDP 312, and the protection circuit 933 is connected to the display device 41 via the LVDS substrate 918.
The LVDS signal (3.3 V) is output to.

The effect control device 300 includes a watchdog timer circuit 324 that monitors the operation of the VDP 312 and a PROM 321 that stores programs executed by the VDP 312 and various data.
FeRAM 323, volume control switch 335, and the like that can retain stored contents even when power is not supplied during a power failure are provided. Further, the LVDS substrate 918 includes a level shift circuit 9.
A real-time clock circuit 338 connected to the high voltage (5V) side of 32 is provided.

The VDP 312 analyzes the effect command transmitted from the game control device 100.
11 (built-in host CPU), a RAM 322 (built-in CP) that provides a work area for the CPU 311
U work memory), CPU I / F for sending and receiving data in CPU 311 and VDP 312
937, HOST CPU I / F 938 that transmits the data in the PROM 321 to the CPU 311 and outputs various commands (display list, motor command, lamp command, sound command) obtained by the CPU 311 analyzing the effect command, VDP 31
2 has a system control register 939 for performing initial setting.

The VDP 312 includes a general-purpose port 942 that transmits and receives signals to and from the outside, a CG bus I / F 941 that reads image information from the image ROM 325, a first VDP-RAM 923, and a second VDP-R.
A DRAM I / F 940 that transmits and receives image information (moving images and still images) to and from the AM 924 is included.

The VDP 312 has a controller 943 that outputs motor control data based on the motor command and outputs LED control data based on the lamp command. Controller 9
43 generates motor control data based on the motor command and outputs it to the panel motor driver 44a, the panel motor sensor 47a, the frame motor driver 44b, and the frame motor sensor 47b in a form that can be distinguished from each other.

Further, the controller 943 decodes the lamp command based on the lamp decoder 944 to generate LED control data, which is converted into the panel decoration LED driver 46a and the frame decoration LE.
The data are output to the D driver 18a (a part of the frame decoration device 18) in a form that can be distinguished from each other.

The VDP 312 has a sound ROM 327 that outputs sound data based on a sound command. The sound ROM 327 selects the sound data stored therein based on the sound command, decodes the sound data based on the sound source LSI 314 (sound decoder), and adjusts the sound quality by the post effector 945 and the volume control switch 335. Output to the first frame speaker (upper speaker 19a) and the second frame speaker (lower speaker 19b).

The VDP 312 includes an image processing circuit that performs image processing based on the display list. Based on the display list, the image processing circuit can select an image ROM 325 or a VRAM.
A preloader circuit 946 that reads out image information from 326 (storage means) and the read out image information as VRAM 326 (or first VDP-RAM 923 and second VDP-RAM 924).
And a graphics decoder 947 for decoding into the VRAM 326 (or the second VDP).
A drawing circuit 948 that draws image information in a frame buffer on the RAM 924), a geometry engine 949 that sets coordinates of the image information, and a VRAM 326 (or first V
An index table circuit 950 for allocating storage areas in the DP-RAM 923 and the second VDP-RAM 924) and a display circuit 951 for displaying and outputting frame buffer data and the like stored in the VRAM 326 (or the first VDP-RAM 923 and the second VDP-RAM 924). Display A, display B, display C), frame buffer data, etc.
2, a signal conversion circuit 313 that outputs to the display device 41 by the LVDS method or the like, and a data transfer circuit 953 that transmits / receives data in the image processing circuit.
4 is used to exchange data with each other.

The VDP 312 has an address bus 935 and a data bus 936. The address bus 935 includes a HOST CPU I / F 938, a system control register 939, and a DRAM I / F.
940, CG bus I / F 941, general-purpose port 942, controller 943, sound ROM 32
7, the graphics decoder 947, the data transfer circuit 953, the preloader circuit 946, the display circuit 951, and the drawing circuit 948 send and receive addresses. Data bus 936
HOST CPU I / F 938, DRAM I / F 940, VRAM 326, CG bus I
/ F 941, controller 943, sound ROM 327, graphics decoder 947, data transfer circuit 953, preloader circuit 946, display circuit 951, and drawing circuit 948 perform data transmission / reception.

In the present embodiment, the first VDP-RAM 923 and the second VDP-RAM 924 are the DRA.
A common address bus 959a and data bus 959b connected to the MI / F 940 are provided. The first VDP-RAM 923 can access the upper 8 bits of the image information (16 bits) via the data bus 959b, and the second VDP-RAM 924 can access the data bus 959b.
The lower 8 bits of the image information can be accessed via the.

Here, in the image information (16 bits), moving image (upper 8 bits) data and still image (lower 8 bits) data are associated with one address. Therefore, the video data is the first VD
The image data is stored in the P-RAM 923 and the still image data is stored in the second VDP-RAM 924.

Thus, when the display circuit 951 designates one address for reading, the first VDP
-Since the moving image data stored in the RAM 923 and the still image data stored in the second VDP-RAM 924 can be read simultaneously, image information (moving image data, still image data) to the display device 41 The transfer speed can be improved.

(Voltage generator)
FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing a connection form of a plurality of voltage generation circuits in the voltage generation unit 800 constituting the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG. 74, the voltage generation unit 800 includes a core voltage generation circuit 801 (first voltage generation circuit), a first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 (second voltage generation circuit), and a second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 (first voltage generation circuit). 3 voltage generation circuit). The core voltage generation circuit 801, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802, and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 have the same configuration as a voltage generation circuit 900 (FIGS. 76 and 77) described later.

The core voltage generation circuit 801 receives a DC power supply (V _IN = 5V) from the power supply device 400, and thereby drives a CPU 311 (VDP core, built-in host CPU) in the VDP 312 (first voltage: target voltage: V1 = 1.05V) and output to the CPU 311. Further, the core voltage generation circuit 801 has a PGD signal (power) that becomes HIGH when the first output voltage maintains a voltage within a predetermined voltage range (for example, target voltage ± 10%) centered on the target voltage (V1). A PGD terminal that outputs a PGD signal that outputs a GOOD signal) and outputs a LOW signal when the voltage is outside the predetermined voltage range.

The first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 generates a second output voltage (target voltage: V2 = 1.5 V) by receiving a DC power supply (V _IN ) from the power supply apparatus 400, and generates the second output voltage (DRAMI of the VDP 312). / F940, the first VDP-RAM 923, the second VDP-RAM 924, etc. However, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 has an EN terminal (enable terminal).
While the PGD signal (HIGH) (first operation permission signal, enable signal V _EN ) is input from the core voltage generation circuit 801 to the EN terminal, a second output is generated by generating a reference voltage V _REF described later. When the voltage can be generated and the PGD signal becomes LOW, the generation of the second output voltage is stopped immediately.

The second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 generates a third output voltage (target voltage: V3 = 3.3V) when the DC power supply (V _IN ) from the power supply device 400 is input, and generates the third output voltage IV of the VDP 312. / O (general-purpose port 942 or the like), the image ROM 325 of the ROM substrate 920, the display device 41 (
(LCD panel) or the like. The second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 also has an EN terminal. While the PGD signal (HIGH) (first operation permission signal, enable signal V _EN ) is input from the core voltage generation circuit 801 to the EN terminal, The third output voltage can be generated by generating the voltage V _REF, and the generation of the third output voltage is stopped as soon as the PGD signal becomes LOW.

[Variation of voltage generator]
FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a modification of the connection form of a plurality of voltage generation circuits in the voltage generation unit 800 constituting the effect control device 300. In the voltage generation unit 800 shown in FIG. 75, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 maintains a voltage within a predetermined voltage range (for example, target voltage ± 10%) with the second output voltage centered on the target voltage (V2). PGD signal (HIGH)
(Second operation permission signal) is output, and when the voltage is outside the predetermined voltage range, the PGD signal (LOW
) Is output. The PGD terminal of the core voltage generation circuit 801 is connected to the EN terminal of the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802, and the PG of the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 is connected.
The D terminal is connected to the EN terminal of the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803. That is, the core voltage generation circuit 801, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802, and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 are connected in a daisy chain with respect to the PGD signal.

Therefore, while the core voltage generation circuit 801 outputs the PGD signal (HIGH) (first operation permission signal), the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 can generate the second output voltage, and the first peripheral voltage generation While the circuit 802 generates the PGD signal (HIGH) (second operation permission signal), the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 can generate the third output voltage.

On the other hand, when the core voltage generation circuit 801 outputs the PGD signal (LOW), the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 prohibits the generation of the second output voltage, so the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 outputs the PGD signal (LOW). In the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803, the generation of the third output voltage is prohibited.

Even if the core voltage generation circuit 801 outputs the PGD signal (HIGH), when the second output voltage of the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 becomes lower than the predetermined voltage range, for example, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 Outputs a PGD signal (LOW), the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 8
In 03, the generation of the third output voltage is prohibited.

In the present embodiment, in the case of FIG. 74, the target value (1.05 V) of the first output voltage is the target value (1.5 V) of the second output voltage and the target value (3.3 V) of the third output voltage. ), It is possible to speed up the entire production control device 300 or the entire VDP 312. In the case of FIG. 75, the first output voltage target value (1.05 V) is designed to be lower than the second output voltage target value (1.5 V), and the second output voltage target value ( 1.5V)
Is designed to be lower than the target value (3.3 V) of the third output voltage.
The rise of the entire zero or the entire VDP 312 can be accelerated.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, a sound ROM 327, a sound source LS are included in the VDP 312.
I314 is incorporated. However, when these are separated from the VDP 312, for example, the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 may supply DC power to the sound ROM 327 and the sound source LSI 314.

In the present embodiment, when the magnitude of the first output voltage as the output voltage _VOUT is monitored and the first output voltage falls outside the predetermined voltage range, the first PGD signal output from the core voltage generation circuit 801 causes the first Generation of the second output voltage of the peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 8
The third output voltage generation 03 is determined to be permitted / prohibited. However, the magnitude of the input voltage _{V IN,} maps the relationship between the output voltage _{V OUT,} by monitoring the magnitude of the input voltage _{V IN,} the range of the output voltage the input voltage _{V IN} is to enable the CPU311 When a value to be generated is reached, a LOW signal is output to the EN terminal of the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the EN terminal of the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 to output the second output of the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802. The generation of the voltage and the generation of the third output voltage of the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 may be prohibited.

[Voltage generation circuit]
FIG. 76 is a block diagram illustrating a connection configuration between the voltage generation circuit 900 and its peripheral elements as an example of the core voltage generation circuit 801, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802, and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803. The voltage generation circuit 900 has a form in which a plurality of external terminals are arranged on one chip. As an external terminal, P to which the input voltage _VIN from the power supply device 400 is input.
AV for supplying control power to the VIN terminal and internal circuits (control circuit 901, etc., see FIG. 77)
IN terminal, MODE terminal for setting whether to enable the efficiency function at low load, EN terminal for allowing / disabling generation of output voltage, SS for setting a soft start time described later
Terminal, ITH terminal to which the phase compensation circuit is connected, PGND terminal to be the output side ground of the voltage generation circuit 900, AGND terminal to be the ground for the internal circuit, _FB terminal to which the feedback voltage V _FB is input, voltage generation circuit 900 has an SW terminal on the output side, a BOOT terminal for voltage adjustment, and a PGD terminal that outputs a power good signal indicating that the output of the voltage generation circuit 900 is good.

A smoothing circuit in which an inductor L and a capacitor C0 are connected in series is connected to the SW terminal (switch terminal), and the inductor L is connected to the SW terminal. Further, a _VOUT terminal serving as an output of the voltage generation circuit 900 is connected to a contact N1 between the inductor L and the capacitor C0. The capacitor C0 has one end connected to the contact N1 and the other end grounded.

Further, a voltage dividing circuit in which a resistor R1 and a resistor R2 are connected in series is connected to the contact N1, and the resistor R1 is connected to the contact N1. The resistor R2 has one end connected to R1 and the other end grounded. A contact N3 between the resistor R1 and the resistor R2 is connected to the FB terminal (feedback terminal).

One end of a ripple reducing capacitor C1 (and capacitor C5) is connected to the PVIN terminal, and the other end of the capacitor C1 is grounded.

One end of a ripple reducing capacitor C5 is connected to the AVIN terminal.
The other end of 5 is grounded. The MODE terminal is connected to the AVIN terminal.

The MODE terminal is a control circuit 901 described later when the output of the voltage generation circuit 900 is low.
This is a terminal for setting whether or not to enable the efficiency function. When the applied voltage to the MODE terminal is set to 0.8 V or more (input voltage _VIN is input), the efficiency function becomes effective. When the applied voltage to the MODE terminal is set to 0.2 V or less (grounded), for example, the efficiency improvement function becomes invalid, and PWM control described later with a fixed frequency is executed. Also, PWM control is executed at high load regardless of the above setting.

The EN terminal (enable terminal) is connected to the input voltage V _IN (its own AVIN terminal) in the core voltage generation circuit 801, and the core voltage generation circuit 801 in the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802.
The second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 is connected to the PGD terminal of the core voltage generation circuit 801 or the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 (see FIGS. 74 and 75).

One end of the capacitor C4 is connected to the SS terminal, and the other end of the capacitor C4 is grounded.

A phase compensation circuit in which a resistor R3 and a capacitor C3 are connected in series is connected to the ITH terminal, and the resistor R3 is connected to the ITH terminal. The capacitor C3 has one end connected to the resistor R3 and the other end grounded.

One end of a resistor R4 (pull-up resistor) is connected to the PGD terminal, and the other end of the resistor R4 is P
It is connected to the VIN terminal (input voltage V _IN ).

One end of the capacitor C2 is connected to the BOOT terminal, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is connected to a contact N2 between the SW terminal and the inductor L.

[Internal block diagram of voltage generator]
FIG. 77 is an internal block diagram of the voltage generation circuit 900. The voltage generation circuit 900 includes a control circuit 901, a first transistor Q1, a second transistor Q2, a reference voltage generation circuit 904,
The circuit includes a soft start circuit 905, an error amplifier 907, an oscillation circuit 908, a PWM comparator 909, and the like.

The first transistor Q1 and the second transistor Q2 are both NMOS transistors (N-channel metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistors), but the first transistor Q1 may be a PMOS transistor (P-channel metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistor). .

The drain terminal of the first transistor Q1 is connected to the PVIN terminal, the source terminal is connected to the SW terminal and the drain terminal of the second transistor Q2 via the contact N4, and the gate terminal is connected to the first buffer 902.

The drain terminal of the second transistor Q2 is connected to the source terminal and SW terminal of the first transistor Q1 via the contact N4, the source terminal is connected to the PGND terminal, and the gate terminal is connected to the second buffer 903.

The voltage generation circuit 900 is provided with a bootstrap circuit connected in series with the diode Db and the capacitor C2. In the voltage generation circuit 900, the anode of the diode Db is connected to the PVIN terminal, the cathode of the diode Db is connected to one side of the capacitor C2 via the BOOT terminal, and the other side of the capacitor C2 is connected to the SW terminal as described above. Has been. Therefore, a voltage that is a sum of the voltage drop across the diode Db and the voltage applied to the capacitor C2 is always applied between the drain terminal and the source terminal of the first transistor Q1, and the first buffer 902 is the same as the voltage applied to the capacitor C2. A voltage is applied. Therefore, even if an NMOS transistor is applied as the first transistor Q1,
The first transistor Q1 can be reliably turned on by the bootstrap circuit.

The control circuit 901 has a fixed frequency pulse width modulation (PWM: Pulse Width).
The first transistor Q1 and the second transistor Q2 are turned on and off alternately by pulse control based on the efficiency control function.
1 ON signal S1 (HIGH, LOW) and the ON signal S2 (LOW) of the second transistor Q2
, HIGH). However, the on / off state of the first transistor Q1 and the second transistor Q2 is controlled to be reversed so that the first transistor Q1 and the second transistor Q2 are simultaneously turned on and no through current is generated. Further, at this time, control may be performed so that one is turned off and the other is turned on after the dead time has elapsed.

Here, the efficiency improvement function is the on-off control of the first transistor Q1 and the second transistor Q2 when the output voltage V _OUT is lowered to a predetermined threshold voltage, and the output voltage V _{O.
When the UT} is recovered and the output voltage V _OUT is maintained higher than a predetermined threshold voltage, the output of the control circuit 901 is omitted by thinning out the clock signal V _CLK from the oscillation circuit 908 ( As a result, the first transistor Q1 and the second transistor Q2 are thinned out), thereby improving the efficiency of the voltage generation circuit 900 (reducing power consumption).

Therefore, the pulse control based on the efficiency improvement function is effective when the load connected to the output voltage _VOUT is a low load, that is, when the speed of the voltage drop of the output voltage _VOUT is low.

The voltage generation circuit 900 can select either normal PWM modulation control or pulse control. For example, when the input voltage _VIN is input to the MODE terminal, the pulse control can be selected, and when the MODE terminal is grounded, the PWM modulation control can be selected. However, when the load connected to the output voltage V _OUT is a high load, the output voltage V _O
Frequency of the speed of the voltage drop of the _UT is thinned out quickly becomes the clock signal V _CLK becomes absence differs substantially PWM modulation control decreases. Therefore, in the case of a high load, the voltage generation circuit 900
Generates the output voltage _VOUT by PWM modulation control even if the pulse control is selected.

The reference voltage generation circuit 904 is connected to the EN terminal, and generates a reference voltage V _REF when an enable signal V _EN (PGD signal (HIGH) or input voltage V _IN ) is input.
When the enable signal V _EN is cut off (when the PGD signal (LOW) is input), the generation of the reference voltage V _REF is stopped.

In the steady state, the output voltage V _OUT and the reference voltage V _REF (= V _FB ) are V _OUT =
There is a relationship of ((R1 + R2) / R2) · V _REF . Therefore, the target voltage of the first output voltage (
V1 = 1.05V), second output voltage target voltage (V2 = 1.5V), third output voltage target voltage (V3 = 3.3V) adjust resistor R1, resistor R2, and reference voltage _VREF Can be set.

Soft start circuitry 905, for example, when the reference voltage generating circuit 904 generates the reference voltage V _REF to supply charge to the capacitor C4, and outputs a voltage applied to the capacitor C4 as a soft-start voltage V _SS. Soft start voltage _{V SS} is soft start circuit 905 is a value larger than _{V REF} from the start of feeding after a predetermined time (e.g., 1 ms) elapsed charge on capacitor C4.

The power good circuit includes a determination circuit 906 and a third transistor Q3. The determination circuit 906 is connected to the FB terminal and the gate terminal of the third transistor Q3. The drain terminal of the third transistor Q3 is connected to the PGD terminal, and the source terminal is grounded.

The determination circuit 906 is driven when a predetermined voltage is applied to the AVIN terminal and outputs an ON signal (HIGH) to the third transistor Q3 to turn on the third transistor Q3. At this time, since the current from the resistor R4 connected to the input voltage _VIN flows to the third transistor Q3 (see FIG. 76), the output of the PGD terminal connected to the drain side of the third transistor Q3 is LOW. Become. On the other hand, the determination circuit 906 stops the ON signal when the feedback voltage _VFB is within the predetermined voltage range, thereby turning off the third transistor Q3 and setting the output of the PGD terminal to HIGH.

Note that in the determination circuit 906, the predetermined voltage range may have hysteresis characteristics, and a predetermined voltage range (for example, V _FB) when maintaining the output of the PGD terminal at HIGH, that is, maintaining the output of the ON signal. = V _REF ± 10%) and the voltage range when the output of the PGD terminal is changed from LOW to HIGH, that is, when the ON signal is restored (for example, V _FB = V _REF ± 7% or less) are different from each other. There is.

The error amplifier 907 has a first non-inverting input terminal connected to the output side of the reference voltage generation circuit 904, a second non-inverting input terminal connected to the output side of the soft start circuit 905, and an inverting input terminal connected to the FB terminal. The output terminal is connected to the inverting input terminal of the PWM comparator 909. A phase compensation circuit (resistor R3, capacitor C3) is connected to the output terminal to stabilize the operation of the entire voltage generation circuit 900.

The error amplifier 907 generates an error signal V _ERR based on the difference between the smaller one of the reference voltage V _REF and the soft start voltage V _SS and the feedback voltage V _FB, and outputs this to the PWM comparator 909. .

As the oscillation circuit 908, for example, a ring oscillator in which a plurality of inverters or differential amplifiers are connected in a ring shape, a CR oscillation circuit, an LC oscillation circuit, or the like can be applied. The oscillation circuit 908 is
For example, it starts when a predetermined voltage is applied to the AVIN terminal, and generates a clock signal V _CLK based on V _REF and V _SS .

The slope signal V _SLOPE is, for example, an ON signal (HIGH in the clock signal V _CLK).
) Is integrated in the time direction to obtain a waveform that repeats a slope that rises with time due to the oscillation frequency. The oscillation circuit 908 outputs the clock signal V _CLK to the set terminal S of the flip-flop circuit 910 and outputs the slope signal V _SLOPE as PWM.
Output to the non-inverting input terminal of the comparator 909.

The PWM comparator 909 has an inverting input terminal connected to the output terminal of the error amplifier 907 and a non-inverting input terminal connected to the output terminal of the slope signal V _SLOPE of the oscillation circuit 908. The PWM comparator 909 includes a slope signal V _SLOPE and an error signal V _ERR.
The PWM signal _VPRM is generated based on the magnitude relationship between the flip-flop circuit 91 and the PWM signal _VPRM.
Output to 0 reset terminal R. At this time, for example, when V _ERR ≧ V _SLOPE , P
When the WM signal V _PWM is HIGH (high voltage) and V _ERR <V _SLOPE , the PWM signal V _PWM can be LOW (low voltage).

Flip-flop circuit 910 is to generate and output a control signal V _Q of the duty ratio control circuit 901 is required. The clock signal V _CLK of the oscillation circuit 908 is input to the set terminal S of the flip-flop circuit 910, the PWM signal V _PWM is input from the PWM comparator 909 to the reset terminal R, and the control signal V _Q is output from the output terminal Q. This is output and input to the control circuit 901. The control signal _VQ is, for example, for generating the ON signal S1 of the first transistor Q1, and the clock signal _VCLK is changed from LOW to H.
The signal changes from LOW to HIGH at the timing when it becomes IGH, and changes from HIGH to LOW at the timing when the PWM signal _VPWM changes from LOW to HIGH. In the control circuit 901, the ON signal S2 of the second transistor Q2 is the control signal _VQ and the clock signal _VCLK.
Based on, LOW next when the control signal _{V Q} is HIGH, the control signal _{V Q} is generated so as to be HIGH when LOW.

The voltage drop protection circuit 911 monitors a voltage supplied to the AVIN terminal to monitor a voltage drop abnormality.

The short circuit protection circuit 912 operates using, for example, a voltage supplied to the AVIN terminal as a power source,
The feedback voltage V _FB is monitored to detect a short circuit abnormality.

The temperature protection circuit 913 operates using, for example, a voltage supplied to the AVIN terminal as a power source,
The temperature of the voltage generation circuit 900 is monitored to detect a temperature abnormality.

The overvoltage protection circuit 914 operates using, for example, a voltage supplied to the AVIN terminal as a power supply, and monitors the feedback voltage _VFB to detect an overvoltage abnormality.

The operation of the voltage generation circuit 900 will be described. First, for example, when the ON signal S2 of the first transistor Q1 rises from LOW to HIGH while the ON signal S2 is LOW, the first transistor Q1 is turned ON (conducted). The second transistor Q2 of the two transistors Q2 is off (
Therefore, the switch voltage V _SW which is the voltage of the SW terminal becomes HIGH. At this time, the slope voltage V _SLOPE starts to rise from the initial value with a predetermined slope.

After that, when the slope voltage V _SLOPE becomes higher than the error signal V _ERR , the ON signal S1 becomes LOW and the ON signal S2 becomes HIGH, whereby the switch voltage V _SW
Becomes LOW. At this time, the slope voltage V _SLOPE voltage is reset to the initial value.

By the way, the crossing timing of the error signal V _ERR and the slope voltage V _SLOPE becomes later as the error signal V _ERR is higher. Accordingly, the on period of the first transistor Q1 is lengthened, and the duty ratio of the on period is increased. Conversely, the lower the error signal V _ERR is, the earlier the crossing timing with the slope voltage V _SLOPE is. Therefore, the first transistor Q1
The ON period becomes shorter and the duty ratio of the ON period becomes smaller.

As described above, the switch voltage V _SW repeats HIGH and LOW, but the inductor L
The output voltage _{VOUT in} which the voltage fluctuation is suppressed within a predetermined range is generated through the smoothing circuit including the capacitor C0. Then, the desired output voltage _VOUT is generated from the input voltage _VIN by determining the duty ratio of the first transistor Q1 according to the error signal _VERR .

The soft start voltage V _SS is equal to the enable signal V _EN (or the PGD signal (HIG
H), input voltage V _IN ) After input, it slowly rises from 0V, and finally the reference voltage V _REF
Rise to a higher voltage value. The error amplifier 907 generates an error signal V _ERR according to the difference between the lower one of the reference voltage V _REF and the soft start voltage V _SS and the feedback voltage V _FB . Therefore, during the period in which the soft start voltage V _SS is lower than the reference voltage V _REF , the error signal V _ERR corresponding to the difference between the feedback voltage V _FB and the soft start voltage V _SS is generated.

Such error signal V _ERR generated by the gradually gently rises from 0V vicinity with increasing soft-start voltage V _SS. Accordingly, since the duty ratio of the first transistor Q1 gradually increases from the minimum value, inrush current to the load connected to the capacitor C0 or _VOUT can be prevented.

[Time chart 1 at power-on and power-off]
78 shows a core voltage generation circuit 801 and a first peripheral voltage generation circuit 8 according to the connection configuration of FIG.
02 is a time chart when the output voltage of the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 is turned on and when the power is turned off. The core voltage generation circuit 801, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802, the second of the present embodiment
Changes in the output voltage when the output voltage of the peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 is turned on and when the power is turned off will be described.

At time t0, the core voltage generating circuit 801, the input voltage V _IN from the power supply 400 is turned on, to generate a first output voltage based on the soft-start voltage V _SS to output the soft-start circuit 905 increases this Let Meanwhile, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the second
In the peripheral voltage generation circuit 803, the input voltage _VIN is input but the PGD signal input to the EN terminal is in a LOW state, and generation of the second output voltage and the third output voltage is prohibited.

At time t1, the first output voltage is 7% lower than the target voltage (V1 = 1.05V).
When the voltage reaches 977 V, the core voltage generation circuit 801 receives the PGD signal (HIG) from the PGD terminal.
H) is output. Thus, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 8
03, second output voltage, respectively, started to produce a third output voltage at the same time, (or at a different speed) at a predetermined speed on the basis of the soft-start voltage V _SS rises. Thereafter, the first output voltage converges to the target voltage (V1 = 1.05V), and the second output voltage reaches the target voltage (V2 =
1.5V), the third output voltage converges to the target voltage (V3 = 3.3V), and becomes a steady state.

When the first output voltage starts to decrease at time t3, and when the first output voltage becomes less than 0.945 V, which is 10% lower than V1, at time t4, the core voltage generation circuit 801 outputs the PDG signal to H
Switch from IGH to LOW. Accordingly, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 are prohibited from generating the second output voltage and the third output voltage, respectively, and the second output voltage and the third output voltage are immediately reduced. 0V. At this time, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 8
02 of the soft-start voltage _{V SS,} and a soft-start voltage _{V SS} of the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 becomes 0V. The rate of drop of the second output voltage and the third output voltage depends on the size of the capacitor component of the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803, respectively.

Thereafter, when the first output voltage recovers to 0.977 V or more, which is 7% lower than V1, the core voltage generation circuit 801 switches the PDG signal from LOW to HIGH again, and the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the second peripheral voltage The generation circuit 803 has the second output voltage and the third output voltage as described above.
An output voltage can be generated.

Here, in the core voltage generation circuit 801 (voltage generation circuit 900), the first output voltage is outside the first predetermined voltage range ΔVa1 (V1 ± 7%: 0.9765V ≦ ΔVa1 ≦ 1.1235V). When the voltage falls within the range from the voltage, a PGD signal (HIGH) is output. Further, the first output voltage has a first predetermined voltage range ΔVb1 (V1 ± 10%: 0.945).
When the voltage in the range of V ≦ ΔVb1 ≦ 1.155V is changed to a voltage outside the range, the PGD signal (LOW) is output. Therefore, even when the first output voltage exceeds 1.155V, the PGD signal (LOW) is output, and the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 are the second output voltage and the third output voltage, respectively. Output voltage generation is prohibited.

Similarly, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 (voltage generation circuit 900) has a second output voltage of the second output voltage.
A PGD signal (HIGH) may be output when a voltage that falls outside the predetermined voltage range ΔVa2 (V2 ± 7%: 1.395V ≦ ΔVa2 ≦ 1.605V) is within the range. it can. Further, the second output voltage has a second predetermined voltage range ΔVb2 (V2 ± 10%
: PGD signal (LOW) can be output when the voltage is within the range of 1.35V ≦ ΔVb2 ≦ 1.65V).

Similarly, the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 (voltage generation circuit 900) has a third output voltage of third.
A PGD signal (HIGH) may be output when a voltage that falls outside the predetermined voltage range ΔVa3 (V3 ± 7%: 3.069V ≦ ΔVa3 ≦ 3.531V) is within the range. it can. Further, the third output voltage has a third predetermined voltage range ΔVb3 (V3 ± 10%
: PGD signal (LOW) can be output when the voltage within the range of 2.97 V ≦ ΔVb3 ≦ 3.63 V) becomes a voltage outside the range.

[Time chart 2 at power-on and power-off]
FIG. 79 is a time chart when the output voltages of the core voltage generation circuit 801, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802, and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 are turned on and when the power supply is cut off according to the daisy chain connection form of FIG. is there. In FIG. 79, the time indicating how the output voltages of the core voltage generation circuit 801, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802, and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 are sequentially increased when the power is turned on and sequentially decreased when the power is turned off. It is a chart.

As described above, at time t0, the core voltage generation circuit 801 outputs the soft start voltage V output from the soft start circuit 905 when the input voltage _VIN is input from the power supply device 400.
_Although the first output voltage is generated based on _SS and is raised, the generation of the second output voltage and the third output voltage is still prohibited.

At time t1, the first output voltage is 7% lower than the target voltage (V1 = 1.05V).
When the voltage reaches 977 V, the core voltage generation circuit 801 receives the PGD signal (HIG) from the PGD terminal.
H) is output. Thus, the first peripheral voltage generating circuit 802 starts to generate a second output voltage, rises at a predetermined speed on the basis of the soft-start voltage V _SS. Further, the first output voltage converges to the target voltage (V1 = 1.05V).

At time t2, the second output voltage is 1.3% lower than the target voltage (V2 = 1.5V) by 1.3%.
When the voltage reaches 5V, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 receives the PGD signal (HIG) from the PGD terminal.
H) is output. Thus, the second peripheral voltage generating circuit 803 starts to generate a third output voltage, rises at a predetermined speed on the basis of the soft-start voltage V _SS. Then, the second output voltage converges to the target voltage (V2 = 1.5V), and then the third output voltage is also the target voltage (V3 =
3.3V) converges to a steady state.

When the first output voltage starts to decrease at time t3, and when the first output voltage becomes less than 0.945 V, which is 10% lower than V1, at time t4, the core voltage generation circuit 801 outputs the PDG signal to H
Switch from IGH to LOW. As a result, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 is prohibited from generating the second output voltage, and the second output voltage immediately decreases to 0V.

When the second output voltage starts to decrease at time t4 and becomes less than 1.35V, which is 10% lower than V2 at time t5, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 switches the PDG signal from HIGH to LOW. . As a result, the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 is prohibited from generating the third output voltage, and the third output voltage immediately decreases to 0V.

Even if the core voltage generation circuit 801 operates normally, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802
When the second output voltage decreases, the generation of the third output voltage of the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 is stopped, so that the malfunction of the peripheral circuit such as the display device 41 can be prevented.

[Production control device and LVDS board casing]
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the external appearance of the effect control device 300 and the LVDS board 918. FIG.
As shown in 0, the effect control device 300 and the LVDS board 918 are arranged in separate housings. For example, one corner of the housing 956 that houses the effect control device 300 is cut into a rectangular parallelepiped, and the LVDS substrate 918 is housed in a housing 957 that is slightly smaller in the width and depth directions than the rectangular parallelepiped. have. Although not shown, the housing 95
6 and the housing 957 are connected by a harness and a connector. Thus, since the production control device 300 is separated from the LVDS board 918, the housing 956 that houses the production control device 300 is designed with a strong one to prevent unauthorized modification of the production control device 300. can do.

Further, since there is a gap 958 between the housing 956 and the housing 957, the LVDS substrate 918 (
Transmission of heat generated by the power generation circuit 919) to the effect control device 300 can be reduced. Further, it is preferable to form a heat sink by forming a concavo-convex shape by forming a large number of slits on the surface of the housing 957 for housing the LVDS substrate 918. In FIG. 79, the vertically long fins 960 are formed on the side surface of the housing 957 and the circular heat radiation hole 961 is formed on the upper surface of the housing 957, but they may be attached in reverse. As described above, the heat radiation amount can be improved by increasing the surface area of the housing 957 (LVDS substrate 918), and deterioration of the LVDS substrate 918 due to heat can be prevented.

[Operations and effects of the fourth embodiment]
According to the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 displays on the display device 41 a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game for displaying the identification information in a variable manner, and an effect related to the variable display game. Possible production control means (production control device 300) is provided. The effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) is a storage means (for example, the first VDP-RAM) that stores image information.
923, storage circuit such as the second VDP-RAM 924) and game control means (game control device 1)
Image processing means (CPU 311, image processing circuit) that processes image information based on a command from (00), voltage generation means (voltage generation unit 800) capable of generating a voltage to be supplied to the storage means and the image processing means, Is provided. The voltage generation unit (voltage generation unit 800) generates a first output voltage (target voltage: V1 = 1.05V) to be applied to the image processing unit, and the first output voltage is the first.
A first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) that outputs a first operation permission signal (PGD signal (HIGH)) when within a predetermined voltage range (ΔVa1), and storage means when the first operation permission signal is input A second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) that generates a second output voltage (target voltage: V2 = 1.5 V) applied to (for example, the first VDP-RAM 923 and the second VDP-RAM 924), The first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) includes the first
When the output voltage falls outside the first predetermined voltage range (ΔVb1), the first operation permission signal (PGD signal (H
IGH)) is stopped, so that the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) is stopped.
) To stop generating the second output voltage.

Thereby, the image processing means (CPU3) constituting the effect control means (effect control device 300).
11) The second output voltage of the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) when the voltage supply from the first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) is stopped (or the voltage is lowered). By generating the storage means (for example, the first VDP-RAM 923, the second V
A malfunction of the DP-RAM 924) can be prevented. For example, for image processing means (CP
The power supply to the first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) of U311 is stopped (
Alternatively, as a result of the voltage drop, image processing means (CPU 311) from the first voltage generation circuit.
) When the supply of voltage to the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) is stopped, the storage means (for example, the first
A malfunction of the VDP-RAM 923 and the second VDP-RAM 924) can be prevented.

According to the fourth embodiment, the target value (1.05 V) of the first output voltage is lower than the target value of the second output voltage (1.5 V). Thereby, the start-up of the entire effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) including the storage means and the image processing means can be accelerated.

Further, according to the fourth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is a peripheral circuit (for example, general-purpose port 942, RO) connected to the image processing means (CPU 311 and image processing circuit).
The M substrate 920 and the display device 41) are provided, and the voltage generation means (voltage generation unit 800) receives a third output voltage (target voltage: V3 = 3.3V) applied to the peripheral circuit when the first operation permission signal is input. )
Is provided with a third voltage generation circuit (second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803). The first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) stops outputting the first operation permission signal (PDG signal (HIGH)) when the first output voltage is outside the first predetermined voltage range (ΔVb1). Generation of the second output voltage by the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) and generation of the third output voltage by the third voltage generation circuit (second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803) are stopped.

Thereby, the image processing means (CPU3) constituting the effect control means (effect control device 300).
11) The second output voltage of the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) when the voltage supply from the first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) is stopped (or the voltage is lowered). And the generation of the third output voltage of the third voltage generation circuit (second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803) are prevented, thereby preventing malfunction of the storage means and the peripheral circuit.

According to the fourth embodiment, the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) is
When the second output voltage falls within the second predetermined voltage range (ΔVa2), the second operation permission signal (PGD signal (HIGH)) is output, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) is the image processing means (CP
U311, a peripheral circuit (for example, general-purpose port 942, ROM board 920, display device 41) connected to the image processing circuit), and the voltage generation means (voltage generation unit 800) receives the second operation permission signal. A third voltage generation circuit (second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803) that generates a third output voltage (target voltage: V3 = 3.3 V) to be applied to the peripheral circuit is provided. The first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) stops outputting the first operation permission signal (PGD signal (HIGH)) when the first output voltage is outside the first predetermined voltage range (ΔVb1). The generation of the second output voltage by the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) is stopped, and the second operation permission signal (PGD signal (HIGH)) is stopped along with the generation of the second output voltage. The generation of the third output voltage by the third voltage generating circuit (second peripheral voltage generating circuit 803) is stopped by stopping the output. The second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) generates a second operation permission signal (PGD signal (HIGH) when the second output voltage falls outside the second predetermined voltage range (ΔVb2).
)) Is stopped, the generation of the third output voltage by the third voltage generation circuit (second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803) is stopped.

Thereby, the image processing means (CPU3) constituting the effect control means (effect control device 300).
11) The second output voltage of the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) when the voltage supply from the first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) is stopped (or the voltage is lowered). And the generation of the third output voltage of the third voltage generation circuit (second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803) are prevented, thereby preventing malfunction of the storage means and the peripheral circuit. Further, even if the first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) is operating normally, the third voltage is applied when the second output voltage of the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) decreases. By stopping the generation of the third output voltage of the generation circuit (second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803), malfunction of the peripheral circuit can be prevented.

In the above configuration, the storage means for storing the image information is replaced with a storage means for storing the audio information (such as the sound ROM 327), and the image processing means for processing the image information is replaced with an audio processing means for processing the audio information ( The fourth embodiment can be applied even if the CPU 311) is replaced.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is obvious that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. For example, a plurality of embodiments can be combined. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 25 production button 25b touch panel 30 game board 32 game area 36 first start winning opening (first start winning area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device (second starting winning area)
39 Special variation prize winning device 41 Display device 42 Third start winning prize port 44 Board directing device 46 Board decoration device 50 Collective display device (LED)
100 Game control device (main board)
300 Production control device (sub-board)
311 CPU
610 Fluctuation display area 615 Fluctuation display area 630 Reservation display part 633 Reservation display 640 Reservation digestion area 650 Special figure 1 Retention number display part 660 Special figure 2 Retention number display part 680 Fanfare background 681 Big hit character (big hit display)
800 Voltage generation unit 801 Core voltage generation circuit (first voltage generation circuit)
802 First peripheral voltage generation circuit (second voltage generation circuit)
803 Second peripheral voltage generation circuit (third voltage generation circuit)
923 1st VDP-RAM
924 2nd VDP-RAM

Claims (1)

A game comprising: display means capable of displaying a variable display game for displaying a plurality of identification information in a plurality of columns based on establishment of the start condition; and effect control means capable of executing an effect related to the variable display game. In the machine
The production control means includes
It is possible to execute stop control that puts predetermined identification information in a variable display into a stop state,
Before executing the temporary stop control for making the temporary stop state different from the stop state, it is displayed in the same row as the predetermined identification information in the variable display, and is displayed before or after the variable display direction for the predetermined identification information. A gaming machine characterized in that the identification information is changed so as to be in a state in which it is more difficult to visually recognize the predetermined identification information.

Images